JP5122085B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other and derives and displays a display result, and is advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device. A special gaming state in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to become the specific display result as compared with the case of the normal state after the specific gaming state is ended when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, as well as the transition to the specific gaming state It relates to a gaming machine to be transferred to.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to be advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In such a gaming machine, the game control means transmits a display result command capable of specifying the display result of the variable display of the identification information, and the identification information is displayed in the variable display device based on the display result command received by the display control means. In some cases, the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. For example, Patent Document 1 derives and displays a left middle right stop symbol on a variable display device as a display result of variable display based on the fact that the display control means receives a command for designating a left middle right stop symbol. A gaming machine is described. Further, in Patent Document 1, when the display control means has received the variation pattern command, but has failed to receive a command when part or all of the command specifying the left middle right stop symbol has not been received, As for the symbol, it is described that a symbol (so-called initial appearance) displayed when the power is turned on is displayed.

JP 2000-317092 A (paragraph 0105-0111, FIG. 26)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a part or all of the command for designating the left middle right stop symbol is not received, the symbol (initial appearance) displayed when the power is turned on is displayed. Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may be disadvantaged more than necessary. In addition, since the display control means cannot determine whether it is a specific display result unless it receives all three commands respectively specifying the left, middle and right stop symbols, the number of commands to be transmitted by the game control means increases. Therefore, the control burden of the game control means is large.

  Therefore, the present invention enables the player to recognize the display result of the variable display even when the display control means cannot receive the command for designating the display result of the variable display. It aims at providing the gaming machine which can reduce a control burden.

A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display device (for example, a variable display device 9) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other and derives and displays a display result. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the display device, the player shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, step S1514). The special game state (for example, the probability change is likely to be the display result of the variable display of the identification information compared to the normal state after the specific game state is finished). A game machine that executes a post-transition notification effect for notifying whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific gaming state, Game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the row and display control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 for controlling the display state of at least the variable display device among the electrical components used for the game effect) The game control means executes a post-transition notification effect as to whether or not to make the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device a specific display result, whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Whether or not the identification information in the variable display device is variable based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the part for executing steps S1509, S1510, and S1514 in the game control microcomputer 560). Variable display time that determines the variable display time from the start of display until the display result is derived and displayed Variable for transmitting a variable display command capable of specifying the variable display time determined by the fixed means (for example, the part of steps S203, S204, S205, and S206 in the game control microcomputer 560). Display command transmission means (for example, a part that executes steps S332 to S343 in accordance with the command transmission table shown in FIG. 46 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) and a display that transmits a display result command that can specify the determination result by the pre-decision means Result command transmission means (for example, the part that executes steps S332 to S343 in accordance with the command transmission table shown in FIG. 46 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) and the end of the specific gaming state are notified when the specific gaming state ends. End An end notification command transmitting means for transmitting an end notification command for executing an end notification effect, and the display control means executes variable display of identification information of the variable display device based on the variable display command and the display result command. Then, based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the variable display command, variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device (for example, steps S826 to S828 and S1843 in the production control microcomputer 100). To S1849 and S1872) and post-transition notification effect execution means for executing the post-transition notification effect after the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, steps S1923 to S1955 and S980 to S996 in the effect control microcomputer 100). and partial) to be executed, the end notification command And a terminated notification executing means for executing a termination notification effect based on it has been sent, the variable display command transmission means, as a variable display command, the variable display of the display result of the identification information of the variable display device by the predetermination means A variable display command for specific display (for example, commands 8004 (H) to 8009 (H)) that can be specified as a specific display result, or display of variable display of identification information of the variable display device by a predetermining unit. A variable display command for non-specific display (for example, commands 8000 (H) to 8003 (H)) that can specify that the result is determined not to be a specific display result is transmitted (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560). 46) Steps S332 to S343 are executed according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. The line means is determined to change the display result of the variable display of the variable display device identification information to the specific display result by the specific display variable display command and the predetermining means and to determine that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. When a display result command that can be specified (for example, commands 8C02 (H) to 8C05 (H) shown in FIG. 27) is received, the variable display time specified by the variable display command for specific display has passed. As a specific display result, special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying on the variable display device a special display result indicating that a transition to the special game state is made after the specific game state is completed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). The probability variation determined in step S1840 using the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table selected in step S1839. The part is derived and displayed in step S1872), and the variable display command for specific display and the predetermining means determine that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result and the predetermined transition condition When a display result command (for example, command 8C00 (H) shown in FIG. 27) capable of specifying that it is determined not to be established is received, the variable display time specified by the specific display variable display command has elapsed. Based on the above, as a specific display result, a non-special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying on the variable display device a non-special display result indicating that a transition to the special game state is not performed after the specific game state ends (for example, production Using the normal big hit symbol determination table selected in step S1835 in the control microcomputer 100 A portion that is derived and displayed in step S1872 for the non-probable variation determined in step S1840), a display result command that can specify that it is determined that the post-transition notification effect is to be executed by the specific display variable display command and the predetermining means. , A non-special display result derivation display means at the time of notification effect execution after transition for deriving and displaying the non-special display result on the variable display device based on the fact that the variable display time specified by the variable display command has elapsed. For example, in the production control microcomputer 100, when it is determined as Y in step S1838, the normal big hit symbol determination table selected in step S1835 is selected, an uncertain change symbol is determined in step S1840, and derived in step S1872. Display part) and variable display command for specific display were received, but the display result When the command cannot be received, the non-special display result derivation display at the time of non-reception that derives and displays the non-special display result on the variable display device based on the passage of the variable display time specified by the variable display command for specific display Means (for example, when the production control microcomputer 100 determines N in step S1831 and Y in step S1833, the non-decision determined in step S1840 using the normal big hit symbol determination table selected in step S1835) The post-transition notification effect executing means is shifted when the non-special display result is derived and displayed by the post-transition notification effect non-special display result derivation display means. and in particular game state, perform the notification effect after migration (e.g., effect control for microcode The computer 100 executes steps S1923 to S1955 after determining the uncertain variable in step S1840 based on the determination of Y in step S1838). Then , the end notification command transmission means is predetermined as an end notification command. It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result by the means, and it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, or the identification information of the variable display device is variable by the predetermining means It is determined that the display result of the display is a specific display result, and a command capable of specifying that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied is transmitted, and the display control means is a non-reception non-special display result derivation display means When a non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device by As a result of a command that can be specified by the pre-determining means being determined to change the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device to the specific display result and to be determined to satisfy the predetermined transition condition Based on the above, the end notification effect by the end notification execution means further includes an end notification effect execution means for executing an end notification effect to notify that a predetermined transition condition is established .

Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a variable display device (for example, the variable display device 9) that performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be identified, and displays and displays the display result. And when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device, it is shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and a predetermined transition condition is established ( For example, the special gaming state in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is more likely to be the specific display result after the specific gaming state is ended when the probability variation big hit is determined in step S1514). (For example, a game machine that executes a post-transition notification effect for informing whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after transitioning to a specific gaming state) A game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and a display control means (for example, symbol control) for controlling at least the display state of the variable display device among the electrical components used for the game effect. Microcomputer 100a) and electric component control means (for example, a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) for controlling a predetermined electric component other than the variable display device among electric components used for game effects. The control means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is a specific display result, whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and whether or not a post-transition notification effect is executed. Predetermining means (for example, steps S1509, S1510, S1514 in the game control microcomputer 560) A variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time from the start of variable display of the identification information in the variable display device until the display result is derived and displayed based on the determination result of the prior determination means For example, a part for executing steps S203, S204, S205, and S206 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a variable display command transmission for transmitting a variable display command that can specify the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means. 46 (for example, a part for executing steps S332 to S343 in accordance with the command transmission table shown in FIG. 46 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a display result command transmission for transmitting a display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the predetermination unit Means (e.g., gaming control microcontroller) 46 in which the computer 560 executes steps S332 to S343 in accordance with the command transmission table shown in FIG. 46) and an end notification command for executing an end notification effect for notifying the end of the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state is ended. And an end notification command transmitting means for transmitting the electrical component variable display command (for example, as shown in FIG. 87) that can specify the content of the variable display command based on the reception of the variable display command. Electrical component variable display command transmission means for transmitting commands 7000 (H) to 700B (H)) to the display control means (for example, a part for executing step S889 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100a), and a display result command Based on what is received, the contents of the display result command are specified. Electrical component display result command transmission means (for example, sound / lamp control microcomputer 100a) that transmits possible electrical component display result commands (for example, commands 7C00 (H) to 7C07 (H) shown in FIG. 87) to the display control means. The step of executing step S889), and an electrical component end notification command transmitting means for transmitting to the display control means an electrical component end notification command capable of specifying the content of the end notification command based on the reception of the end notification command. The display control means executes variable display of the identification information of the variable display device based on the electric component variable display command and the electric component display result command, and the variable display time specified by the electric component variable display command has elapsed. Execute variable display to derive and display the display result on the variable display device The stage (for example, the part that executes the same processing as steps S826 to S828, S1843 to S1849, and S1872 in the symbol control process of step S787 in the symbol control microcomputer 100) and notification after the transition to the specific gaming state A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the effect (for example, a portion of steps S1923 to S1955 and S980 to S996 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and an end notification based on the transmission of the electrical component end notification command. The variable display command transmitting means is determined by the predetermining means to make the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device as the specific display result as the variable display command. Can be specified for specific display The change display command (for example, commands 8004 (H) to 8009 (H) shown in FIG. 27) or the prior decision means determines that the variable display display result of the variable display device identification information should not be the specific display result. Is transmitted (for example, commands 8000 (H) to 8003 (H)) according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. 46 in the game control microcomputer 560 (steps S332 to S343). The variable display executing means displays the electric component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command and the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device by the predetermining means. It is determined that the result will be the specific display result and determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. When an electrical component display result command (for example, commands 7C02 (H) to 7C05 (H) shown in FIG. 87) transmitted based on the reception of the display result command capable of specifying that Based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the component variable display command, a special display result indicating that the transition to the special game state is completed after the specific game state is terminated is derived to the variable display device as the specific display result. Special display result deriving and displaying means for displaying (for example, in the symbol control microcomputer 100a, step S1840 using the probability change jackpot symbol determination table selected in the symbol control process in step S787 by the same processing as step S1839) The probability variation symbol determined by the same processing is derived and displayed by the same processing as step S1872. The display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device by the predetermining means and the electric display variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command The electrical component display result command (for example, command 7C01 (H) shown in FIG. 87) transmitted based on the reception of the display result command that can be specified that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied. ) Is received, based on the fact that the variable display time specified by the electrical component variable display command has elapsed, the specific display result indicates that the game state will not shift to the special game state after the specific game state ends. Non-special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying the non-special display result on the variable display device (for example, a symbol control microcomputer) In the symbol 100a, in the symbol control process in step S787, the non-probable variable symbol determined in the same process as in step S1840 using the normal big hit symbol determination table selected in the same process as in step S1835 is the same as in step S1872. It is possible to specify that it is determined that the notification effect after the transition is executed by the pre-determining means and the electric component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command) When the variable display time specified by the electric component variable display command has elapsed when the electric component display result command transmitted based on the reception of the correct display result command is received, the variable display device Derived and displayed non-special display result Non-special display result derivation display when executing post-transition notification effect (For example, in the symbol control microcomputer 100a, when the symbol control process in step S787 determines Y in the same processing as in step S1838, the normal big hit symbol determination table selected in the same processing as in step S1835 And a non-probable variable symbol is determined by the same process as in step S1840, and the part derived and displayed by the same process as in step S1872), and the electrical component transmitted based on the reception of the variable display command for specific display When the variable display command is received but the electric component display result command is not received, the non-special display result is derived to the variable display device based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the electric component variable display command. Non-reception non-special display result derivation display means to display (for example, symbol control marker In the black computer 100a, when the symbol control process in step S787 is determined to be N in the process similar to step S1831, and determined to be Y in the process similar to step S1833, the normal time selected by the process similar to step S1835 The post-transition notification effect execution means executes the post-transition notification effect execution unit, and includes a portion that derives and displays the uncertain variable symbol determined by the same processing as step S1840 using the jackpot symbol determination table. when the non-special display result deriving display specific game state that is migrated when a non-special display result is derived displayed by means executes the notification effect after migration (e.g., the symbol control microcomputer 100a, the symbols in step S787 In the control process, it is determined as Y by the same process as step S1838. Based on that there was boss after determining the non-probability variation pattern in the same process as in step S 1840, to execute the same processing as step S1923～S1955), termination notification command transmitting means, as the end notification command, predetermination means It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is to be the specific display result, and it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, or the variable information of the identification information of the variable display device is variably displayed by the predetermining means The display result is determined to be a specific display result, and a command that can specify that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied is transmitted. When a non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, an end notification command is given by the predetermining means. Thus, it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result, and the electrical component is terminated based on the reception of the command that can be specified that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. An end notification effect executing means for executing an end notification effect for notifying that a predetermined transition condition is established as an end notification effect by the end notification executing means based on the notification command being transmitted. Features.
The display control means includes identification information determining means for determining identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result on the variable display device based on the variable display command or the display result command, and the identification information determining means includes: When the variable display command for non-specific display is received, the identification information is determined based on the received variable display command for non-specific display regardless of whether the display result command is received or not. Also good.
The display control means includes identification information determination means for determining identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result on the variable display device based on the electric component variable display command or the electric component display result command. When the information determination means receives the electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the non-specific display variable display command, the information determination means receives the electrical component display result command. The identification information may be determined based on the electric component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the non-specific display variable display command.

The pre-determining means determines whether or not the post-transition notification effect is to be executed when the specific game state is terminated (for example, the probable promotion effect based on the jackpot symbol setting table in step S1514 in the game control microcomputer 560). portion) to determine the presence or absence of the execution, the game control means, the directing period selection means for selecting an effect period that runs the exit notification effect (e.g., portions for performing the steps S448 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) wherein, completion notification command transmitting means, as the end notification command, identifiable command whether it is determined to execute the notification effect after migration to exit the specific game state by predetermination means (e.g., FIG. 28 It sends a command A303 (H) ~A305 (H) ) showing, notification effect execution means after migration, completion Based on that a specific possible commands that are determined to execute the notification effect after migration is sent when exiting a particular game state by predetermination means as known command, as the end notification effect, a notification effect after migration Executed (for example, the portion of steps S980 to S992 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the production period selection means is determined to execute the post-transition notification production when the specific gaming state is ended by the prior decision means. Sometimes, a longer period is selected as the effect period of the end notification effect compared to the case where it is determined not to execute the notification effect after the transition when the specific game state is ended by the predetermination means (game control microcomputer) 560 sets a long time as the jackpot end time in step S448) It may be composed of sea urchin.

The game control means transmits a specific game state start command (for example, a fanfare command) indicating start of a specific game state (for example, steps S1306 and S1309 in the game control microcomputer 560). The specific gaming state start command transmission means includes the variable display display result of the variable display device as the specific display result by the predetermining means as the specific gaming state start command , including a portion for executing S1311, S1313, and S1314. Then, it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, or it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is set as the specific display result by the predetermining means, and the predetermined transition condition is set. It is possible to specify that it was decided not to establish Commands (e.g., command A000 shown in FIG. 27 (H), A001 (H ), A003 (H) ~A005 (H)) sends (e.g., step S1309, S1311, S1313 in the gaming control microcomputer 560, The part that executes S1314), the display control means is variable by the predetermining means as the specific gaming state start command when the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device by the non-special display result derivation display means when not receiving It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the display device is the specific display result, and the specific gaming state is determined based on the transmission of a command that can specify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The transition notification effect is displayed to notify whether or not a predetermined transition condition has been established. The post-transfer notification effect executing means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, when it is determined as Y in step S1877a and step S1877b, based on the fact that the re-lottery execution flag in round is set in step S1877c, step S1956). In the part for executing S1968, in the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a, when it is determined as Y in the same process as in steps S1877a and S1877b, the re-lottery execution flag during round is set in the same process as in step S1877c. Basically, it may be configured to include a portion that executes the same processing as steps S1956 to S1968.

The game control means transmits a specific game state start command (for example, a fanfare command) indicating start of a specific game state (for example, steps S1306 and S1309 in the game control microcomputer 560). The specific gaming state start command transmission means includes the variable display display result of the variable display device as the specific display result by the predetermining means as the specific gaming state start command , including a portion for executing S1311, S1313, and S1314. Then, it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, or it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is set as the specific display result by the predetermining means, and the predetermined transition condition is set. It is possible to specify that it was decided not to establish Commands (e.g., command A000 shown in FIG. 27 (H), A001 (H ), A003 (H) ~A005 (H)) sends (e.g., step S1309, S1311, S1313 in the gaming control microcomputer 560, The part that executes S1314), the display control means is variable by the predetermining means as the specific gaming state start command when the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device by the non-special display result derivation display means when not receiving It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the display device is the specific display result, and the specific gaming state is determined based on the transmission of a command that can specify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The transition notification effect is displayed to notify whether or not a predetermined transition condition has been established. The post-transfer notification effect executing means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, when it is determined as Y in step S1877a and step S1877b, based on the fact that the re-lottery execution flag in round is set in step S1877c, step S1956). In the part for executing S1968, in the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a, when it is determined as Y in the same process as in steps S1877a and S1877b, the re-lottery execution flag during round is set in the same process as in step S1877c. On the basis of the above, a part that executes the same processing as steps S1956 to S1968) and the notification effect at the end when the predetermined transition condition is established in the notification effect after transition by the notification effect execution means after transition. End notification effect prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of the end notification effect by the execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 100 that is controlled not to proceed to step S1980 when determined as Y in step S1979). It may be configured to include.

According to the first aspect of the present invention, when the variable display command for specific display is received but the display result command cannot be received from the game control means, the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device. Therefore, even if the display control means cannot receive the display result command, at least it can be recognized whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display Can be recognized by the player, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged more than necessary. Further, the display control means can determine whether or not the specific display result is based on one command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted by the game control means can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control means can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is configured to execute a post-transition notification effect that notifies whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after shifting to a specific gaming state, a sense of expectation as to whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied Can be maintained for a long period of time with respect to the player, and an excitement of not knowing when the post-transition notification effect is executed can be given. In addition, a command capable of specifying that it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is set as the specific display result and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied is transmitted as the end notification command. Based on the above, since it is configured to execute an end notification effect that notifies that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, even if the display control means cannot receive the display result command, It can be notified that the transition condition has been established. Therefore, the internal state of the gaming machine and the display state can be matched without increasing the control burden of the game control means. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a special gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. In addition, it does not give an impression that the player is disadvantaged as compared with the case where the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied after the notification that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Can be.

According to the second aspect of the present invention, when the electric component variable display command is received but the electric component display result command cannot be received, the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device. Therefore, at least whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result can be recognized, the display result of the variable display can be recognized by the player, and the player is disadvantaged more than necessary. Can be prevented. Further, the display control means can determine whether or not the specific display result is based on one command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted by the game control means can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control means can be reduced. Furthermore, since it is configured to execute a post-transition notification effect that notifies whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied after shifting to a specific gaming state, a sense of expectation as to whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied Can be maintained for a long period of time with respect to the player, and an excitement of not knowing when the post-transition notification effect is executed can be given. In addition, a command capable of specifying that it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is set as the specific display result and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied is transmitted as the end notification command. Based on the above, since it is configured to execute an end notification effect that notifies that a predetermined transition condition has been established, even if the display control means could not receive the electrical component display result command, It can be notified that a predetermined transition condition has been established. Therefore, the internal state of the gaming machine and the display state can be matched without increasing the control burden of the game control means. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a special gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. In addition, it does not give an impression that the player is disadvantaged as compared with the case where the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied after the notification that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Can be.

According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, when it is determined to execute the post-transition notification effect when the specific gaming state is ended, it is determined not to execute the post-transition notification effect when the specific gaming state is ended. Compared to the time, since it is configured to select a longer period as the effect period of the end notification effect, the end notification effect is useless when the transition notification effect is not executed when the specific gaming state is ended. It is possible to prevent a situation where the program is executed for a long time.

According to the invention described in claim 6 , it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is set as the specific display result as the specific game state start command and is determined to satisfy the predetermined transition condition. Based on the transmission of the command that can identify the display, the post-transition notification effect that notifies whether or not a predetermined transition condition has been established is executed. Even if it cannot be received, it can be notified that a predetermined transition condition has been established. Therefore, the internal state of the gaming machine and the display state can be matched without increasing the control burden of the game control means. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a special gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. In addition, it does not give an impression that the player is disadvantaged as compared with the case where the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied after the notification that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Can be.

According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when the notification effect after transition is informed that the predetermined transition condition is established, execution of the notification effect at the end is prohibited. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the end notification effect is further executed after the post-transition notification effect even though the predetermined transition condition has already been notified.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7 variably display and display a plurality of types of decorative decorations that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the hitting of the hit ball at the start winning opening 14). A variable display device 9 for deriving and displaying the result is arranged. In this embodiment, the variable display device 9 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and is configured such that decorative symbols are displayed and controlled in three display areas (decorative symbol display areas) of left, middle, and right. Yes. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined variation time has elapsed since the symbol variation display is started (except for the temporary stop before the so-called re-variation).

  In this embodiment, the symbols “0” to “9” are used as decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9. During the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols “0” to “9” are displayed in numerical order.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers “0” to “99”, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display numbers such as “0” to “9” which are simplified.

  The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. The special symbol display 8 that performs variable display of the special symbols is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, a special symbol hold memory display comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In this example, since the special symbol display 8 and the special symbol hold memory display 18 are provided separately, the number of hold memories can be displayed even during variable display. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a start winning opening 14 through which a game ball can be won. The game ball won in the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The start winning opening 14 is provided with a variable winning ball device 15 that performs an opening / closing operation. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16 (not shown in FIG. 1). When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player.

  A specific game that occurs when a specific display result (a jackpot symbol: for example, symbols “00” to “99” other than “-”) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 8 below the start winning opening 14. A special variable winning device that is opened by the solenoid 21 in the state (big hit game state) is provided. It should be noted that different symbols may be displayed on the special symbol display 8 depending on whether the probability big hit or the normal big hit. For example, the special symbol display 8 displays the symbols “40” to “79” when the probability big hit, and the special symbol display 8 displays the symbols “00” to “39” when the big hit is normal. It may be. In addition, the same symbol may be displayed on the special symbol display 8 at the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit. For example, the symbols “00” to “79” may be displayed on the special symbol display 8 regardless of whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit. The special variable winning device includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23. In addition, the same symbol (for example, “80” to “99”) may be displayed on the special symbol indicator 8 during the so-called sudden probability big hit and the small hit, or different symbols may be displayed. May be.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided directly above the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball wins the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Also, below the left speaker 27 is provided a prize ball LED 51 that is lit while paying out the prize ball, and below the right speaker 27 is provided a ball cut LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut. Yes. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In this embodiment, an operation button 120 as an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided immediately above the hitting operation handle 5. This operation button 120 is operated by the player during execution of the promising change promotion effect of the jackpot symbol which will be described later. When the operation button 120 is pressed by the player, it is turned on when the electrode comes into contact with it, and an on signal (detection signal) is mounted on the board (in this embodiment, on the effect control board 80). It is output to the mounted effect control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 3). In the example shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 120 is provided immediately above the hitting operation handle 5, but may be provided at another location (for example, the hitting ball supply tray 3).

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the start winning port 14 and is detected by the start port switch 14a, the special symbol display device is in a state in which variable symbol special display can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the end of the previous variable display). 8, variable display (variation) of the special symbol is started, and variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the variable display device 9. If the variable symbol special display cannot be started, the reserved memory number for the special symbol storage memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot game state. That is, the game state shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to a normal state other than the big hit game state. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls have won the big winning opening. The It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, the big hit gaming state is continued for 15 rounds.

  The special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 is synchronized with the decorative symbol variable display on the variable display device 9. Here, synchronization means that the variable display period is the same. When the special symbol display 8 stops and displays the big hit symbol (“7”), the variable display device 9 stops when the left, middle and right decorative symbols are aligned (for example, “222” and “777”). Is displayed. Hereinafter, the stop display in the state in which the left, right, and right decorative symbols are aligned on the variable display device 9 is expressed as a big hit symbol (specific display result) of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  When the variable display device 9 is stopped and displayed in an odd number of left and right decorative symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”) (for example, “777”), it is a big hit game In addition to the transition to the state, when the jackpot game state ends, the probability change state (refers to the probability variation state, which means that the jackpot is determined with a higher probability (ratio) than the normal gaming state when the jackpot determination is made, both high probability state and Control). That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined that the probability is changed internally, and when the symbol change symbol is stopped as a stop symbol at the end of the decorative symbol variation display as described above (an odd number of symbols in the middle left and right are aligned) When the display is stopped and the decoration symbol is “123” or “357”, the transition is made to a certain change state as a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. In addition, when it is notified that a certain degree of promotion has been promoted in a probability change promotion effect or a re-lottery effect, which will be described later, a predetermined change condition is established and the state is changed to a probability change state.

  As described above, among the decorative symbols “0” to “9”, an odd number of decorative symbols that cause a probability variation state is referred to as a probability variation symbol, and an even number of decorative symbols that do not cause a probability variation state is referred to as a non-probability variation symbol. . Further, the fact that the variable display device 9 is stopped and displayed in a state where the left, middle and right odd-numbered decorative symbols are aligned is expressed as the probability variation (special display result) of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  Note that, when the variable display device 9 displays a probable variation symbol as a jackpot symbol or a non-probable variation symbol, the special symbol display 8 displays the same jackpot symbol (“7”).

  In this embodiment, when a probability change notification effect (details will be described later) is executed during or after the big hit game round, it is notified whether or not the player has been promoted to probability change. In addition, when it is determined in advance that a probable big hit will be made and the player has never operated the operation button 120 in the probable promotion effect (details will be described later), the game state is changed to the probable state. However, it is not notified whether or not it has been promoted to probability change in the probability change promotion effect.

  In this embodiment, when it is predetermined to make a probable big hit, control is performed so that only the transition to the high probability state is performed, and the transition to the short time state for shortening the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not performed. . In that case, it is only necessary to set a time reduction flag separately from the probability change flag and reduce the variation time based on the time reduction flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the player is in the state of probability change when not notified of whether or not the player has been promoted to probability change. In addition, when changing the gaming state to the probable state, simply changing to a high probability state in which the probability that a special symbol or decorative symbol will be a big hit symbol is increased, the probability that a normal symbol will be a winning symbol, or a variable prize The probability that a normal symbol becomes a winning symbol without changing the state of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 and the change in the state of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 are set to the short time state (the short time flag is set). It is only necessary to execute the control based on the fact that the controlled state is controlled.

  For example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit excluding a normal big hit or a sudden probable big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, the special symbol display device 8 and the variable display device 9). (The execution condition for variable display is easily satisfied). In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the special symbol time-short state where the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened. In the special symbol short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is accelerated). As a result, it becomes easier to win a start (transition to a high base state), and the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state).

Also, when migrating a gaming state without rope line notification of whether promoted to probability variation in probability variation state, the process proceeds to a high probability state, may shift the game state to the time reduction state. Even in such a case, it can be made difficult to determine whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time state, and the player can be prevented from recognizing whether the gaming state is the probability variation state.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for decorative symbols that have not yet stopped when the stopped decorative symbols constitute a part of the jackpot symbol. And all or part of the decorative symbols are in a state of being variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, in the left, right and right display areas of the variable display device 9, the left and right display areas are displayed in a state in which a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) which is a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The display area is still in a variable display state, and all or some of the symbols in the display area are synchronously variably displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, variable display) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the device 9, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned), which is the reach display mode or reach.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the variable display device 9 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a background display mode (for example, color) of the variable display device 9 is displayed. May be changed.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 31. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an interface board 66, a relay board 77, and an effect control board 80 that are mounted on the gaming machine. The main board 31 has a basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a gate switch 32a, a start port switch 14a, a V winning switch 22, a count switch 23, and a winning port switch 29a. , 30a, 33a, 39a, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying a signal to the basic circuit 53, a solenoid 16 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 20, and a path in the special winning opening. An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21A for switching in accordance with a command from the basic circuit 53 is mounted.

  The gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the V winning switch 22, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, and other switches may be referred to as sensors. That is, the name of the game medium detection means is not limited as long as it is a game medium detection means (game ball detection means in this example) that can detect a game ball. Each of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a that perform winning detection is also a winning detection means that detects the winning of a game ball in the winning area. Note that even if a passing gate such as the gate 32 is used, if a prize ball is paid out, a game ball entering the passing gate becomes a winning and a switch provided on the passing gate (for example, The gate switch 32a) becomes a winning detection means. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game ball that has won the V winning area is detected by the V winning switch 22 and also by the count switch 23. Therefore, the number of game balls won in the special winning opening corresponds to the number detected by the count switch 23. However, the game balls won in the V prize area are detected only by the V prize switch 22, and the number of game balls won in the big prize opening is determined by the number detected by the V prize switch 22 and the number detected by the count switch 23. You may make it become the sum. Further, the V winning area may not be provided, and a continuation right may always be generated in rounds other than the final round.

  The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as storage means (variation data storage means for storing fluctuation data) used as a work memory, and a control operation according to the program. A game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 is included. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 refers to a central processing unit (a portion excluding storage means such as the ROM 54 and RAM 55, the I / O port unit 57, etc.) of the basic circuit 53 that operates according to a program. Main processing and interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing and interrupt processing by an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505) are executed. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a portion of the basic circuit 53 including a storage means such as a ROM 54 and a RAM 55, a random number circuit 503, a serial communication circuit 505, an I / O port unit 57, etc. in addition to the CPU 56. It transmits and receives various data to and from the microcomputer mounted on each board (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80).

  In this embodiment, the ROM 54, the RAM 55 serving as storage means as a work memory, and the I / O port unit 57 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is also input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer stop operating. It becomes a state. Accordingly, during the period in which the reset signal is at a high level, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output, and in the period in which the reset signal is at a low level, An operation stop signal for stopping the operations of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output. A reset circuit may be mounted on each control board (including the main board 31), or a reset circuit is mounted on one or more of the plurality of control boards, and a reset signal is sent from there to another control circuit. You may make it supply to a board | substrate.

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 910 has decreased to a predetermined value or less is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53 via the payout control board 37. A clear signal indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53.

  The clear signal is branched in the main board 31 and is also supplied to the payout control board 37. Note that the state of the clear signal input by the game control microcomputer 560 via the input port may be output to the payout control board 37 via the output port.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the variable display device 9 that receives and displays the decorative design variably, the sound output control of the speaker (sound output device) 27, the display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, “effect control” means display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. It means performing such as. In this embodiment, the effect control means is provided by the effect control microcomputer 100 that performs display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. Realized.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80. In this embodiment, the display control of the variable display device 9, the sound output control of the sound output device 27, and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c are performed using one control board (production control board 80). Although a case where display control is performed will be described, a plurality of control boards may be used. For example, in addition to the effect control board 80 for effect control, a lamp driver board for controlling each lamp and a sound output board for controlling the sound output device may be provided. In this case, the effect control means is realized by a control microcomputer and a control circuit mounted on the lamp driver board and the sound output board in addition to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the display control means is realized by an effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the variable display device 9.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver 352. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the button lamp 130. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesizing IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the production control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver 352, and the speech synthesis IC 173 (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. Is. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of main board 31 and signal lines of an effect control command transmitted from main board 31 to effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 produces an effect control command by using eight signal lines CD0 to CD7 for transmitting the effect control signal. Transmit to the control board 80. In addition, a signal line of an effect control INT signal for transmitting and receiving a strobe signal is also wired between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main board 31 is connected to the wiring from the start port switch 14a. The main board 31 is also provided with wiring from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 which is a big winning opening, and various switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a for detecting the winning of a game ball to other winning openings. It is connected. Further, the main board 31 is connected to a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and a wiring to the solenoid 21A for switching the path in the special winning opening. .

  The main board 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58, and an output circuit 59. The game control microcomputer 560 operates in accordance with a clock circuit 501, a reset controller 502 that functions as system reset means, random number circuits 503a and 503b, a ROM 54 that stores a game control program, a RAM 55 that is used as a work memory, and a program. CPU 56, CPU 56 for transmitting an interrupt request signal (interrupt request signal by timer interrupt) and I / O port unit 57 are incorporated.

The clock circuit 501 outputs a reference clock signal CLK having a predetermined period generated by dividing the system clock signal by 2 ⁷ (= 128) to the random number circuits 503a and 503b. When a low level signal is input for a predetermined period, the reset controller 502 outputs a predetermined initialization signal to the CPU 56 and the random number circuits 503a and 503b to reset the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with two random number circuits 503a and 503b having different ranges of random value values that can be generated. The random number circuit 503a is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 12-bit random number circuit) that generates a 12-bit pseudo-random number. The 12-bit random number circuit 503a has a function of generating a random number having a value within a range that can be generated by 12 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 4095). The random number circuit 503b is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 16-bit random number circuit) that generates a 16-bit pseudo-random number. The 16-bit random number circuit 503b has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated in 16 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 65535). In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 includes two random number circuits is described. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may include three or more random number circuits. In this embodiment, when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are comprehensively expressed, or when indicating either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, This is called a random number circuit 503.

  Next, the configuration of the random number circuit 503 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 503. In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same. As shown in FIG. 5, the random number circuit 503 includes a counter 521, a comparator 522, a count value permutation changing circuit 523, a clock signal output circuit 524, a count value update signal output circuit 525, a random value read signal output circuit 526, a random number update. A system selection signal output circuit 527, a selector 528, a random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530, a random value storage circuit 531, an inversion circuit 532, a latch signal generation circuit 533, and a timer circuit 534 are included.

  In this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 determines whether or not the display result of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information is a specific display result (for example, the combination of display symbols of the special symbol display device 8 is a combination of jackpot symbols) A random number for jackpot determination is generated. When the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the specific display result is based on the random number generated by the random number circuit 503, the game state is changed to a specific game state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state). Transition.

  The counter 521 receives a predetermined signal selected by the selector 528 and outputs a count value C in response to the signal input from the selector 528. In this case, the counter 521 inputs a predetermined initial value, and cyclically updates the count value C from the initial value to a predetermined final value according to a certain rule, and outputs it. Further, when the count value C is updated to the final value, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. In this embodiment, when a notification signal is output from the counter 521, the CPU 56 updates the initial value.

  In this embodiment, every time a signal is input from the selector 528 (every time a rising edge in the signal from the selector 528 is input), the counter 521 increments the count value C from “0” to “4095” by one. Count up. Further, when the counter 521 counts up the count value C to “4095”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. Then, the CPU 56 inputs a notification signal from the counter 521 and updates the initial value. Then, the counter 521 counts up the count value C again from the initial value updated by the CPU 56 to “4095”. When counting up to “4095”, the counter 521 starts counting from “0” again. Then, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56 when it counts up to a value (final value) immediately before the updated initial value. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when all the count values are input, as will be described later. In this case, when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the count value to “0”.

  The comparator 522 determines whether the input count value is larger than the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value is larger than the random number maximum value (exceeded the random number maximum value). ), A notification signal may be output to the counter 521. In this case, for example, when the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value, the notification signal is output to the counter 521 before the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. . For example, consider a case where the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, when the counter 521 counts up from “0” to “256” and further outputs the count value “257”, the comparator 522 determines that the input count value “257” exceeds the random number maximum value “256”. Determine and output a notification signal to the counter 521. When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 updates the count value to “258” and outputs it without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. By repeatedly executing the above processing, the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value while inputting from the count value “257” to “4095”. Output a notification signal. The counter 521 repeatedly updates and outputs the count value without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524 while the notification signal is input from the comparator 522. By doing so, until the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1, the count value is controlled to be counted up from “257” to “4095” at a high speed, Control is performed so that random numbers from “257” to “4095” are skipped (not stored in the random value storage circuit 531).

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 includes a count value permutation change register (RSC) 536, an update rule selection register (RRC) 542, and an update rule memory 543. The count value permutation change register 536 stores count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation (order of arrangement from the initial value to the final value), which is the update order of the count value C counted up by the counter 521. . When the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 displays the count value C permutation that the counter 521 counts up and updates. The permutation is changed to a different permutation from when “01h” is not stored. In this case, when the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 switches the update rule used for changing the permutation of the count values. In addition, when the counter 521 starts updating the count value after switching the update rule used for changing the count value permutation, the count value permutation change data in the count value permutation change register 536 is initialized from “01h” by the CPU 56. The value is returned to “0 (= 00h)” (cleared).

  Instead of clearing the count value permutation change data by the CPU 56, the random number circuit 503 may clear the count value permutation change data. For example, when the register value is set in the update rule selection register (RRC) 542 based on the count value permutation change data “01h” being written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 The register value of the count value permutation change register 536 may be cleared.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 first counts from the counter 521 until the final count value “4095” is first input. The count value is output as it is according to the currently set update rule. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value update rule when the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 inputs the final value after the change (the value immediately before the initial value) from the counter 521, and updates the count value. Will be changed.

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 selects an update rule corresponding to the register value of the update rule selection register 542 from the update rule memory 543, and sets it as an update rule used for changing the count value permutation. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from the initial value of the count value to the final value according to the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value again in order from the initial value “0”. To do. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts counting in accordance with the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value in order from the changed initial value. The permutation from the initial value to the final value will be changed. Then, the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs a count value according to the changed permutation.

  In this embodiment, when the maximum random number to be generated is limited by setting the maximum random number in a random number maximum value setting register 535 described later, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 counts The value C is limited to the maximum random number or less, and the permutation is changed and output. For example, it is assumed that the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the update rule A to the update rule B to change the count value permutation. Shall. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation to “256 → 255” according to the update rule B based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522. → → → 0 "and output.

  As described above, when the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the update rule to use the permutation of the count value C. Change and output. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved.

  The comparator 522 includes a random number maximum value setting register (RMX) 535 that stores random number maximum value setting data for designating the maximum value of random R (random number maximum value). The comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value updated by the counter 521 according to the random number maximum value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 has a random number maximum value (for example, “00FFh”) indicated by the count value input from the counter 521 and the random number maximum value setting data (for example, “00FFh”) stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. 256 "). When the comparator 522 determines that the input count value is equal to or less than the random number maximum value, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531.

  In this embodiment, the comparator 522 specifically performs the following control. The comparator 522 obtains the initial value of the count value from the CPU 56 when updating the initial value of the count value, and obtains the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number. For example, when the initial value of the count value is “157” and the maximum random number value is “256”, the comparator 522 calculates the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number value as “100”. The comparator 522 counts up how many count values have been input from the initial value as the count values are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the number of input count values from the initial value reaches “100”, the comparator 522 determines that all count values from the initial value “157” to the maximum value “256” have been input. Then, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input to the counter 521. By determining based on the number of count values, even when the count value permutation circuit 523 has changed the count value permutation, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the maximum random number or less. When all count values are input, a notification signal can be output to the counter 521.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 includes a cycle setting register (RPS) 537 for storing cycle setting data for designating the cycle of the clock signal output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532 (that is, the count value update cycle). The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 based on the cycle setting data stored in the cycle setting register 537, and generates a random number circuit. A clock signal (random number generating clock signal SI1) used to generate a random number value is generated inside 503. By doing so, the clock signal output circuit 524 operates to output the random number generation clock signal SI1 for updating the count value C to the counter 521 on condition that the clock signal has been input a predetermined number of times. . The period setting data is data for setting how many times the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 is to be divided. The clock output circuit 524 outputs the generated random number generating clock signal SI1 to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532. For example, when the cycle setting data “0Fh (= 16)” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 by 16, and generates random numbers. A clock signal SI1 is generated. In this case, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is “cycle of system clock signal × 128 × 16”.

  The count value update signal output circuit 525 includes a count value update register (RGN) 538 that stores count value update data “01h”. The count value update data is data for requesting update of the count value. The count value update signal output circuit 525 outputs the count value update signal SI3 to the selector 528 in response to the count value update data “01h” being written in the count value update register 538.

  The random value read signal output circuit 526 includes a random value take-in register (RLT) 539 for storing random value take-in data “01h”. The random value acquisition data is data for requesting acquisition of the count value to the random value storage circuit 531. The random value read signal output circuit 526 generates a random value read signal for requesting reading of the random value in response to the random value fetch data “01h” being written in the random value fetch register 539. Output to the circuit 533.

  The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 includes a random number update method selection register (RTS) 540 that stores random number update method selection data. The random number update method selection data is data for designating one of the random number update methods that is a method for updating the value of the random R. The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 responds to the random number update method selection data written in the random number update method selection register 540, and corresponds to the random number update method specified by the written random number update method selection data. The update method selection signal is output to the selector 528 and the latch signal generation circuit 533.

  The selector 528 selects either the count value update signal SI 3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525 or the random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs the selected signal to the counter 521. When a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a first random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the first random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a count value update signal. The count value update signal SI3 output from the circuit 525 is selected and output to the counter 521. On the other hand, when a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a second random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the second random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a clock signal. The random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the circuit 524 is selected and output to the counter 521. When the first update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 receives a clock signal according to the count value update signal SI3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525. A numerical value update instruction signal for instructing update of numerical data synchronized with the random number generation clock signal SI1 output from the output circuit 524 may be output to the counter 521.

  The random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 includes a random number circuit activation register (RST) 541 that stores random number circuit activation data “80h”. The random circuit activation data is data for requesting activation of the random number circuit 503. When random number circuit activation data “80h” is written to the random number circuit activation register 541, the random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 outputs a predetermined random number circuit activation signal to the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 537, and the counter 521 and the clock The signal output circuit 524 is turned on. The random number circuit 503 is activated by starting the count value updating operation by the counter 521 and the internal clock signal output operation by the clock signal output circuit 524.

  The random value storage circuit 531 is a 16-bit register, for example, and stores a random R value that is a random number used in the jackpot determination in the game control process. The random value storage circuit 531 stores the count value C output from the counter 521 via the comparator 522 as a random R value in response to the input of the latch signal SL from the latch signal generation circuit 533. Each time the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the random value storage circuit 531 reads the count value C updated by the counter 521 and stores the random R value.

  FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing a configuration example of the random value storage circuit 531. As shown in FIG. 6, the random value storage circuit 531 includes two AND circuits 201 and 203, two NOT circuits 202 and 204, 16 flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and 16 OR circuits. 2201-2216.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is connected to the output terminal of the latch signal generation circuit 533 and the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the flip-flop circuit 2101. Are connected to clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203.

  The input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 204. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 204 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 203, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 and one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  Input terminals D1 to D16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to an output terminal of the comparator 522. The clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminals Q1 to Q16 are connected to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  The input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204 and the output terminals of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and the output terminals are connected to the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560. .

  The operation of the random value storage circuit 531 will be described. FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random value storage circuit 531 and the timing at which the random value storage circuit 531 outputs each signal. As shown in FIG. 7, when the output control signal SC (high level signal in this example) is not input from the CPU 56 mounted in the game control microcomputer 560 (that is, to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203). When the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (when the input is at the low level) (at the timings T1, T2, and T7 in the example illustrated in FIG. 7), the two input terminals of the AND circuit 201 are connected. Both inputs are high. Therefore, the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a high level. The signal SR output from the AND circuit 201 is input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116.

  The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 respond to the rising edges of the signal SR input from the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16, and receive the bit data C1 to C1 of the count value C input from the comparator 522 via the input terminals D1 to D16. C16 is latched and stored as bit data R1 to R16 of a random value. The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 output random R bit data R1 to R16 to be stored from the output terminals Q1 to Q16.

  When the output control signal SC is not input (in the example shown in FIG. 7, the period up to the timing T3 and the period after the timing T6), the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at the low level. The signal SG output from the output terminal of the circuit 203 is at a low level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The circuits 2201 to 2216 output high level signals. That is, the signals SO1 to SO16 output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level regardless of whether the values of the input random R bit data R1 to R16 are “0” or “1”. (“1”). By doing so, the value output from the random value storage circuit 531 is always “65535 (= 1111111111111111b)”, and the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, even if an attempt is made to read a random number from the random value storage circuit 531, only the same value “65535” can always be read from the random value storage circuit 531, and when the output control signal SC is not input, the random value storage circuit 531 becomes an unreadable (disabled) state. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as a random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each big hit determination shown in FIG. 16, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  When the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 when the latch signal SL is not input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (in the example illustrated in FIG. 7, the period from the timing T4 to the timing T6), Since the inputs to the two input terminals are both at the high level, the signal SG output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at the high level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a low level signal. A low level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, when the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level, the output from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is high. A level signal is output. In addition, when a signal input to the other input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, a low level signal is output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216. That is, the values of the random R bit data R1 to R16 input to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are unchanged from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 (that is, the values of the bit data R1 to R16 are “ “1” is output when it is “1” and “0” when it is “0”). By doing so, random R can be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 is in a readable (enable) state.

  However, if the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 before the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at a low level. Even if the output control signal SC is input while the signal SL is being input (in the example shown in FIG. 7, the period from the timing T3 to the timing T4), the signal SG output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203. Remains low. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The signals SO1 to SO16 output from the circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level. Even though the output control signal SC is input, the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the latch signal SL is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the output control signal SC. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as a random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each big hit determination shown in FIG. 16, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  In addition, when the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 before the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a low level. Even if the latch signal SL is input while the control signal SC is being input (timing T5 in the example shown in FIG. 7), the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 remains at the low level. It becomes. Therefore, the signal SR input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 does not rise from the low level to the high level, and the random R bit data R1 to R16 stored in the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116. Although the latch signal SL is input, the stored random number is not updated. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the latch signal SL.

  The inverting circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 in which the polarity of the clock signal is inverted by inverting the signal level in the random number generating clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, the inverting circuit 532 outputs the generated inverted clock signal SI2 to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  Note that the random number circuit 503 may include a delay circuit instead of the inverting circuit 532. In this case, the delay circuit generates a delayed clock signal obtained by delaying the clock signal by delaying the random number generating clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. The delay circuit outputs the generated delayed clock signal to the latch signal generation circuit 533. Therefore, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs a latch signal to the random value storage circuit 531 in synchronization with the delayed clock signal obtained by delaying the random number generation clock signal SI1.

  The latch signal generation circuit 533 is configured using a selector, a flip-flop circuit, and the like. The latch signal generation circuit 533 receives the random number read signal from the random number read signal output circuit 526 and the inverted clock signal SI2 from the inversion circuit 532, and stores the random value in the random value storage circuit 531. SL is output. The latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL in accordance with the random value update method designated by the random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. In this case, when the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 selects the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532, and the latch signal It outputs to the random value storage circuit 531 as SL. On the other hand, when the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526. In synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the circuit 532, the latch signal SL is output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  The timer circuit 534 inputs a winning detection signal SS indicating that a winning of a game ball to the starting port 14 has been detected from the starting port switch 14a. The timer circuit 534 measures the time during which the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the start port switch 14a. Then, when the measurement time reaches a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms), the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value capture data “01h” in the random value capture register 539 of the random value read signal output circuit 526. For example, the timer circuit 534 is configured by an up counter or a down counter that is activated in response to the input of a high level signal. The timer circuit 534 receives the reference clock signal CLK sequentially input from the clock circuit 501 while the input from the start port switch 14a is at a high level (that is, while the winning detection signal SS is continuously input). Count up or down. Then, when the count value to be counted up or down reaches a value corresponding to 3 ms, the timer circuit 534 determines that the winning detection signal SS is input from the start port switch 14a, and receives the random number value capture data “01h”. Write to the random value fetch register 539.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map of a storage area in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 8, the area from address 0000h to 1FFFh in the storage area of the game control microcomputer 560 is allocated to the ROM 54. An area from addresses 7E00h to 7FFFh is allocated to the RAM 55. Further, the area from the address FD00h to the address FE00h is allocated to a built-in register such as the random number maximum value setting register 535.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the area from address 0000h to address 1FFFh allocated to the ROM 54 includes a user program area and a user program management area. A program (user program) 550 created in advance by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) is stored in the user program area in the area of addresses 0000h to 1F7Fh. Further, data (user program execution data) necessary for the CPU 56 to execute the user program 550 is stored in the user program management area in the area of addresses 1F80h to 1FFFh. Of the areas 7E00h to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55, the areas 7E00h to 7EFFh are unused areas, and the areas 7F00h to 7FFFh are used as work areas.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the user program management area. As shown in FIG. 9, the initial value changing method selected by the user among the initial value changing methods which are methods for changing the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 is included in the area of address 1F97h. The initial value change method setting data for designating is stored. Further, in the areas 1F98h and 1F99h, RAM address data for specifying an address in the RAM 55 (designated RAM address) designated in advance by the user among addresses 7F00h to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55 is stored. The In this case, of the values indicating the designated RAM address, the lower value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F98h address, and the higher value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F99h address.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial value change method setting data. As shown in FIG. 10, the initial value change data is composed of 8-bit data. The initial value change data “00h” is data specifying that the initial value is not changed as the initial value change method. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “00h” is set, the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value from a predetermined initial value “0” to a predetermined final value. Become. Further, the initial value change data “01h” is data specifying that the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to a value based on an ID number for identifying the game control microcomputer 560 as an initial value change method. It is. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “01h” is set, the initial value of the counter value updated by the counter 521 is changed from “0” to a value based on the ID number. The count value is updated from the initial value to a predetermined final value. Since the ID number is assigned a different number for each microcomputer, when the value based on the ID number is used as an initial value, a different initial value is set for each gaming machine.

  The user program 550 stored in the user program area will be described. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the user program 550. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the user program 550 includes a random number circuit setting program 551 composed of a plurality of types of program modules, a display result determination program 552, a count value permutation change program 554, and a random program. And a numerical value update program 555.

  The random number circuit setting program 551 is a program for executing a random number circuit setting process for performing initial setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R. That is, the CPU 56 functions as random number circuit initial setting means by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program 551.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the random number circuit setting program 551. As shown in FIG. 12, the random number circuit setting program 551 includes, as a plurality of types of program modules, a random number maximum value setting module 551a, a random number update method selection module 551b, a cycle setting module 551c, a random number circuit activation module 551d, An initial value changing module 551e and a random number circuit selecting module 551f are included.

  The random number maximum value setting module 551a is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the maximum value of the random R preset by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the gaming machine). The CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number maximum value setting module 551a, thereby writing random number maximum value setting data for specifying the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number maximum value setting register 535. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when “255” is set in advance as the maximum value of the random R by the user, the CPU 56 writes the random number maximum value setting data “00FFh” in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the maximum value of the random R is “255”. Is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number update method selection module 551b is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the random number update method (first random number update method or second random number update method) selected by the user. The CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” designating the random number update method selected by the user in the random number update method selection register 540 by executing the process according to the random number update method selection module 551b. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the random number update method selected by the user in the random number circuit 503. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of selecting either the first random number update method or the second random number update method as the random number update method used by the random number circuit 503 for the random number update.

  The cycle setting module 551c is a program for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user (that is, the cycle in which the clock signal output circuit 524 outputs the clock signal to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532). It is a module. The CPU 56 writes processing in the cycle setting register 537 for designating the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user by executing processing in accordance with the cycle setting module 551c. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when the cycle of the internal clock signal is set in advance as “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 16” by the user, the CPU 56 writes the cycle setting data “0Fh” in the cycle setting register 537 and sets the internal clock signal The period “system clock signal period × 128 × 16” is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number circuit activation module 551d is a program module for activating the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503 by writing the random number circuit activation data “80h” into the random number circuit activation register 541 by executing processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d.

  The initial value change module 551e is a program module for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521. The CPU 56 functions as an initial value changing unit by executing processing according to the initial value changing module 551e. The CPU 56 executes the initial value changing module 551e to change the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 by the initial value changing method selected by the user. By doing so, the CPU 56 has a function of selecting an initial value changing method.

  In this embodiment, when the initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored in the area 1F97h in the user program management area, the CPU 56 sets the initial value of the count value for each game control microcomputer 560. The value is changed to a value calculated based on the assigned unique ID number.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the calculated value “150” obtained by adding the predetermined value “50” to the ID number “100” is set in advance as the ID number. Are stored in association with each other. Further, for example, the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100” is stored in advance in association with the ID number. Further, for example, only a predetermined value may be stored in advance in association with the ID number. Then, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 adds a value “150” obtained by adding an ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “50”) stored in advance, and sets the initial count value. The CPU 56 may also use a value “50” obtained by subtracting a predetermined value (eg, “50”) stored in advance from the ID number (eg, “100”) as an initial value of the count value. The game control microcomputer 560 may store the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 as long as data writing is prohibited in the storage area. Alternatively, it may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55.

  When the initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. By doing so, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved, and the initial value of the random number can be made difficult to recognize simply by looking at the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. . Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the transition condition to the big hit state from being illegally established by an action such as generating a captured signal using a radio signal to the gaming machine, and improving security. Can be improved.

  For example, when initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, adds a predetermined value to the ID number). The initial value of the count value is changed to the calculated value obtained. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may calculate a value that is randomly changed using a random number as an ID number, thereby randomly updating a value used for the calculation and obtaining an initial value. By doing so, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number circuit selection module 551f is a program module for setting a random number circuit to be used when executing a timer interrupt process including a game control process from among the random number circuits 503 built in the game control microcomputer 560. The CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number circuit selection module 551f, so that any of the two random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is selected. Set whether to use when executing timer interrupt processing. For example, the CPU 56 uses a 12-bit random number circuit 503a or 16-bit as a random number circuit used when executing the timer interrupt process according to a predetermined set value (a value set in advance by the user) stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. The random number circuit 503b is set.

  Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may determine the variation pattern based on the random number generated by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and perform the jackpot determination based on the random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. In this embodiment, the random value storage circuit 531 exists in each of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b (that is, a random-value storage circuit that stores a random number for 12 bits and a 16-bit random-number storage circuit). A random value storage circuit for storing random numbers exists separately). When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, the CPU 56 is provided in the RAM 55 with the random number read from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the random number read from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. Stored in separate buffer areas. Therefore, even when the timing for reading a random number from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the timing for reading a random number from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same, two different random numbers can be extracted and stored in different buffer areas.

  The random value update program 555 is a program for updating the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 when the first random number update method is selected as the random number update method. The CPU 56 functions as a random value updating unit by executing processing according to the random value updating program 555. When the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 executes the random number value update program 555 and writes the count value update data “01h” in the count value update register 538, whereby the count value is stored in the counter 521. And the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. When the second random number update method is selected as the random number update method, the counter 521 is updated with the random number generation clock signal output from the clock signal output circuit 537, and the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. The value of random R stored in is updated.

  The display result determination program 552 is a program for determining whether or not the display result in the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. The CPU 56 functions as a display result determination unit by executing processing according to the display result determination program 552.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 follows the display result determination program 552 in response to a condition (execution condition) for the game ball winning the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and executing variable symbol special display. Execute the process. Then, the CPU 56 reads the updated random R value from the random value storage circuit 531, and determines whether or not the display result in the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation in which the CPU 56 updates the random R value or reads the random R value when the first random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 13, when the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 writes the count value update data “01h” into the count value update register 538, thereby storing the random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531. The value of R (for example, “2”) is updated. Then, the CPU 56 receives a random R value from the random value storage circuit 531 in response to the fact that the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 15 and the condition (execution condition) for executing the variable symbol special display is established. (For example, “2”) is read out.

  When the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is further updated, an interval equal to or longer than the cycle of the system clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 has elapsed since the random R value was updated during the previous update. Sometimes, the count value update data “01h” must be written to the count value update register 538. This is because it is necessary to secure time for reading the updated random R value from the random value storage circuit 531.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation in which the CPU 56 reads the value of the random R when the second random number update method is selected. As illustrated in FIG. 14, when the second random number update method is selected, the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value capture data “01h” into the random value capture register 539, thereby outputting the counter 521. The count value (for example, “2”) is taken into the random value storage circuit 531 and the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. Then, the CPU 56 reads the updated random R value (for example, “2”) from the random value storage circuit 531.

  Specifically, when the second random number update method is selected, the counter 521 updates the count value C using the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 as a trigger. Thereafter, when the random value fetch data “01h” is written into the random value fetch register 539, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL to the random value storage circuit 531. Then, the random value storage circuit 531 reads and stores the count value output from the counter 521 with the input of the latch signal SL as a trigger. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531.

  If the timer circuit 534 does not write the random number value acquisition data “01h” to the random number value acquisition register 539, even if the counter 521 updates the count value, the random number value storage circuit 531 does not update the counter 521. Do not memorize numerical values. For example, the timer circuit 534 writes the random value take-in data “01h” into the random value take-in register 539, the count value “3” output from the counter 521 is taken into the random value store circuit 531, and the random value store circuit 531 , The random R value “3” stored therein is updated. In this case, the count value output from the counter 521 is updated from “3” to “4” or “5” unless the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value acquisition data “01h” into the random number acquisition register 539 again. However, the random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is not updated, and the random value read from the random value storage circuit 531 remains “3”.

  The count value permutation change program 554 writes count value permutation change data “01h” to the count value permutation change register 536, and executes count value permutation change processing for changing the permutation of count values stored in the random value storage circuit 531. It is a program for. The CPU 56 functions as numerical data permutation changing means by executing processing according to the count value permutation changing program 554. The CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change program 554 and writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536, whereby the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs and inputs to the random value storage circuit 531. The permutation of the count values to be changed is changed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special figure holding memory 570, a big hit determination table memory 571, a flag memory 572, and a start winning port switch timer memory 573.

  In the special figure holding memory 570, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 15 and the execution condition of the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, but the variable display start condition is not yet satisfied (for example, the special symbol display device). 8 is a memory (storage area) for storing pending data including the number of times the execution condition for variable display is satisfied (8 is still executing variable display). The special figure holding memory 570 includes four entries. Each entry includes a holding number and a random R read from the random number storage circuit 531 according to the winning order in the order in which the game balls win the variable winning ball device 15. A value is stored in association with each other. In addition, each time the special symbol variable display in the special symbol display device 8 is finished once or the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display start condition based on the top information of the special symbol holding memory 570 is set. It is established, and variable display based on the top information of the special figure holding memory 570 is executed. In this case, when the condition for starting the variable display of special symbols is satisfied, the information registered in the second or lower place in the special figure holding memory 570 is moved up by one place. In addition, when a game ball newly wins the variable winning ball apparatus 15 during the variable display of the special symbol, the value of the random R read from the random value storage circuit 531 based on the new winning is the special R value. It is registered in the empty entry in the figure holding memory 570.

  The jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a plurality of jackpot determination tables used by the CPU 56 to determine whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, the big hit determination table memory 571 stores a normal time big hit determination table 571a used in a gaming state (referred to as a normal state) other than the probability variation state. Further, the jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a probability change big hit determination table 571b used in the probability change state, as shown in FIG. When the big hit determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIG. 16, the probability of determining a big hit depends greatly on the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, for example, if the set random number maximum value is too small, the difference in the probability of determining a big hit between the case where the normal big hit determination table 571a is used and the case where the probability variation big hit determination table 571b is used is small. As a result, the player's interest in the game is diminished. Therefore, a plurality of determination tables (a plurality of normal big hit determination tables 571a and a plurality of probability variation big hit determination tables 571b) are stored in the big hit determination table memory 571 in association with the random number circuit 503 and the random number maximum value. Also good. Then, the CPU 56 uses the random number circuit 503 to be used and the determination tables 571a and 571b corresponding to the maximum random number among the determination tables stored in the big hit determination table memory 571, and displays the special symbol according to the display result determination program 552. You may make it determine whether the display result of the apparatus 8 is made a big hit symbol. By doing so, even if the type of random number circuit 503 to be used and the maximum random number value are different, it is possible to control so that the probability of determining a big hit is somewhat the same.

  In this embodiment, a 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used. That is, it is assumed that it is decided to use the 16-bit random number circuit 503b in the process of step S151. Therefore, a value in a range (range from 0 to 65535) that can be generated in 16 bits can be taken as random R.

  In the flag memory 572, various flags used in the game control process for controlling the progress of the game are set. For example, in the flag memory 572, a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state and a big hit flag indicating that the game state is a big hit state are set.

  The start port switch timer memory 573 stores a timer value that is added or cleared in accordance with the winning detection signal SS input from the start port switch 14a.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 17 and 18 show main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S5). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as the + 5V power source gradually reaches the specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S5, that is, the high power By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms again whether the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (step S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Control states such as a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out-of-ball flag, etc. An initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing according to the above. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuits 503a and 503b (step S15). In this case, the CPU 56 performs settings in accordance with the random number circuit setting program 551 to make the random number circuits 503a and 503b update the random R value.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S18) and the initial value random number update process (step S18a). The CPU 56 disables the interrupt when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed (step S17), and interrupts when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished. The permission state is set (step S19).

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, whether to generate a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol that generates a jackpot or a hit based on a normal symbol) This is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a normal random number for determination per symbol). A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as a variable display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the game machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set even when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are performed by the timer interrupt process described later. This is because it is executed (that is, the same process is also executed in steps S24 and S25 of the timer interrupt process), so that it does not conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18 and S18a and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number and the initial value random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18 and S18a.

  As described above, a game clerk or the like can easily perform initial initialization by starting the power supply to the gaming machine (for example, turning on the power switch 914) while the clear switch 921 is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the random number circuit setting process (step S15) in the main process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing random number circuit setting processing. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first executes the process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and from among the random number circuits 503a and 503b built in the game control microcomputer 560, the game A random number circuit to be used when executing the timer interrupt process including the control process is set (step S151). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, designation information for designating the random number circuit 503 used when executing a timer interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer). I remember it. Then, the CPU 56 selects either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b according to the designation information stored in the predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, and uses the selected random number circuit when executing the timer interrupt process. Set as a random number circuit. Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, in step S151, whether or not each of a plurality of random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated can be used is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 performs the game control process using only the random number generated by one of the two random number circuits 503a and 503b, the random number is read from the random number circuit not used for the game control process. Processing or the like can be prevented, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  When the CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to be used in step S151, the CPU 56 stops the operation of the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 524, for example, by not writing data to the random number circuit activation register 541 so that the random number circuit 503 is not used. The counter 521 of the set random number circuit is prevented from updating the count value C. Further, for example, the counter 521 of the random number circuit that is set not to use updates the count value C, but the CPU 56 does not output the output control signal SC so that the random number cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. You may control to. Further, for example, the CPU 56 prevents the random number value fetching data “01h” from being written in the random number fetching register 539 of the random number circuit that is set not to be used for the timer circuit 534, and the latch signal generation circuit 533 Control may be performed so that the latch signal SL is not output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  As described above, by setting the random number circuit 503 to be used, by setting only the random number circuit 503 to be used, the range of the random number value to be generated can be appropriately set. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when the big hit determination is performed using a determination table including a distant value (for example, “1” and “100”) as the big hit determination value, the big hit is determined with a predetermined big hit probability (for example, 1/100). In this case, the number of types of determination values to be processed is smaller when the random number by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is used than when the random number by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, and the game control microcomputer 560 is used. The control burden is reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number maximum value setting module 551a included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and generates random number maximum value setting data for designating a random number maximum value preset by the user as a random number maximum value setting register 535. (Step S152). By doing so, the random number maximum value of random R preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503. When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the random number maximum value (any value from “0” to “4095”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the maximum random number value (any value from “0” to “65535”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  In this embodiment, when “0” to “255” are set as the random number maximum value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later. Even when control is performed to write a value greater than “256” as the random number maximum value, values “0” to “255” are set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 due to data corruption or the like. In the case where it is lost, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later.

  As described above, since the maximum value of the random number to be generated is set in advance in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152, a random number having a value larger than the range of random numbers used during execution of the timer interrupt process is generated. Can be prevented, and the processing load of the random number circuit 503 and the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  The CPU 56 checks whether the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152 is not less than a predetermined lower limit value. If the random number maximum value is not more than the lower limit value, the random number maximum value setting register A random number maximum value resetting process for resetting the random number maximum value set in 535 is executed (step S153).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the initial value changing module 551e included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and executes an initial value changing process for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step). S154).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number update method selection module 551b included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number update method selection data in the random number update method selection register 540 (step S155). By doing so, the random number update method of the random number circuit 503 is set. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “10h” in the random number update method selection register 540. That is, in this embodiment, the second random number update method is set as the random number update method of the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the cycle setting module 551c included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and sets the cycle setting data (the reference clock signal by how many minutes) that specifies the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user. The data for setting whether to circulate) is written in the period setting register 537 (step S156). By doing so, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S157). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a setting value indicating whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521. And stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 54. Whether or not the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value in accordance with a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. Set In this embodiment, when the CPU 56 determines in step S157 that the initial value input to the counter 521 is to be updated, the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (when a notification signal is input from the counter 521). An initial value update flag indicating that the initial value is updated is set. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which an initial value update flag is set according to a predetermined set value in step S157. Then, the CPU 56 updates the initial value of the count value output from the counter 521 based on the initial value update flag being set in the random number circuit initial value update process described later.

  Instead of changing the initial value of the count value by the CPU 56, the initial value of the count value may be changed to a predetermined value on the random number circuit 503 side based on the update of the count value to the final value. For example, the random number circuit 503 includes an initial value update data register that stores initial value update data indicating that the initial value is updated, and an initial value change circuit that changes the initial value. In step S157, the CPU 56 performs initial value update. Value update data is set in the initial value update data register. In this case, when the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value, it outputs a notification signal to the initial value change circuit. Then, the initial value change circuit checks whether or not initial value update data is set in the initial value update data register. Then, when the initial value change circuit confirms that the initial value update data is set, the initial value change circuit changes the initial value of the count value to a predetermined value. Note that the initial value changing circuit may change the initial value of the count value whose permutation has been changed in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to change the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S158). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a set value indicating whether or not to change the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 54. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 when the count value is updated by the counter 521 to a predetermined final value according to a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. Set whether or not. In this embodiment, if the CPU 56 determines in step S158 that the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 is to be changed, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of count values when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value. The indicated count value permutation change flag is set. In this embodiment, the case where the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 according to a predetermined set value will be described. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Instead of changing the permutation of the count values under the control of the CPU 56, the permutation of the count values may be changed on the random number circuit 503 side based on the update of the count values up to the final value. For example, the random number circuit 503 includes a permutation change data register that stores permutation change data indicating that the permutation of count values is to be changed. In step S158, the CPU 56 sets the permutation change data in the permutation change data register. In this case, when the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value, the notification signal is output to the count value permutation change circuit 523, and the count value permutation change circuit 523 that has received the notification signal receives the permutation change data in the permutation change data register. Check whether it is set. When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 confirms that the permutation change data is set, it changes the permutation of the count values.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number circuit activation data “80h” in the random number circuit activation register 541 (step S159). By doing so, the CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503.

  Next, the random number maximum value resetting process (step S153) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the random number maximum value resetting process. In the random number maximum value resetting process, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 (step S153a). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not the read random number maximum value is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (step S153b). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, the maximum random number value that can be set in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is from “256” to “4095”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from is lower limit value “256” or less. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, the maximum random number that can be set in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is “512” to “65535”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from the register 535 is equal to or lower than the lower limit “512”.

  When the read random number maximum value is less than or equal to the lower limit value, the CPU 56 resets the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 to a predetermined value (step S153c). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit “256”, the CPU 56 determines the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value set in is reset to a predetermined value “4095”. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit “512”, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value. The random number maximum value set in the register 535 is reset to a predetermined value “65535”.

  As described above, when the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is equal to or smaller than the predetermined lower limit value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number due to a malfunction of the game control microcomputer 560 or an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal for the game machine. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a random number having an excessively small value range from the minimum value to the maximum value is generated.

  Next, the initial value changing process (step S154) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the initial value changing process. In the initial value changing process, the CPU 56 first reads the initial value changing method setting data stored in the area 1F97h in the user program execution data area, and specifies the initial value changing method selected by the user. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the read initial value changing method setting data is “01h” (step S154a), thereby specifying the initial value changing method selected by the user.

  When the value of the initial value change method setting data is “01h”, the CPU 56 sets the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 to a value set based on the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560. Change (step S154b). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In step S154b, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. Further, for example, in step S154b, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, the ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “100”). The initial value of the count value is set to the calculated value (for example, “200”). When the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag indicating that the initial value of the count value has been changed (step S154c).

  When the CPU 56 changes the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S154b, the CPU 56 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and the value set based on the ID number is determined. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the maximum random number. If it is determined that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the CPU 56 does not change the initial value input to the counter 521 (for example, resets the initial value to “0”). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If the value of the initial value change method setting data is not “01h” in step S154a (that is, the value of the initial value change method setting data stored in the area 1F97h of the user program execution data area is “00h”). In the case), the CPU 56 does not change the initial value of the count value, ends the initial value changing process as it is, and proceeds to step S155.

  By executing the random number circuit setting process, various signals are input to the random number circuit 503 when the timer interrupt process including the game control process is performed, and various signals are generated in the random number circuit 503. FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random number circuit 503 and the timing at which each signal is generated in the random number circuit 503.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the clock circuit 501 increases the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at predetermined intervals (timing T11, T21,... Shown in FIG. 22). A reference clock signal CLK (see FIG. 22A) is input to 503.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK supplied from the clock circuit 501 to generate a random number generation clock signal SI1 (see FIG. 22B). For example, the clock signal output circuit 524 raises the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at timings T11, T12,. To output a random number generating clock signal SI1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, for ease of explanation, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK by two to generate the random number generating clock signal SI1. However, in an actual random number circuit, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is from “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”. Therefore, in an actual random number circuit, the clock signal output circuit 524 is set in the cycle setting register 537 in a range from “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 256”. The reference clock signal CLK is divided by a division ratio corresponding to the cycle setting data “07h” to “FFh” to generate a random number generating clock signal SI1. The random number generating clock signal SI 1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532.

  In this embodiment, since the second random number update method is set in the random number circuit setting process, the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 to the selector 528. When the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 selects the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs it to the counter 521. . Each time the rising edge of the random number generating clock signal SI1 supplied from the selector 528 is input, the counter 521 updates the count value C and outputs it to the count value permutation changing circuit 523.

  The inversion circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 (see FIG. 22C) by inverting the signal level of the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. For example, the inverting circuit 532 decreases the signal level of the output terminal from the high level to the low level at timings T11, T12,. As a result, the inverted clock signal SI2 is output. Further, the inverted clock signal SI <b> 2 generated by the inverting circuit 532 is output to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 milliseconds) elapses after the winning detection signal SS (see FIG. 22D) is input to the latch signal generation circuit 533, the random number value read signal output circuit 526 generates a disturbance. A numerical reading signal is input. For example, when the signal level of the output terminal of the random number read signal output circuit 526 rises from a low level to a high level, the random value read signal is input to the latch signal generation circuit 533. The latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal input from the random value read signal output circuit 526 in response to the input of the second random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. A latch signal SL (see FIG. 22E) is output in synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 supplied from 532.

  As described above, the random number circuit 503 updates the count value C at the timings T11, T12, T13..., And outputs the latch signal SL at the timing T22 different from the timings T11, T12, T13. The random number value is stored in 531.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically during a period when interrupts are permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Subsequently, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the switch circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch) Process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the initial value is updated when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process (see step S157), and the counter of the random number circuit 503 is checked. Processing for updating the initial value input to 521 is performed (random circuit initial value updating processing: step S22).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number used for game control is performed (step S23). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S24). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S25).

  When the determination random number update process, the initial value update process, and the display random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the count value permutation output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503. Processing is performed (step S26). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the count value permutation change process is determined depending on whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 of the random number circuit setting process. Then, the CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change process based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting an effect control command related to the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 and sending the effect control command (effect control command control process: step S29). Note that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and the like (step S30). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. . The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a test terminal process which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S31). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (Step S32: Solenoid output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S33).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S34).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S35).

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process has a flag. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S21 to S35 (except for steps S31 and S33) correspond to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S36) and ends the process.

  Next, the random number circuit initial value update process (step S22) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing random number circuit initial value update processing. In the random number circuit initial value update process, the CPU 56 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S220). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the initial value update flag is set (step S221). That is, in the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the setting for updating the initial value is made when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (see step S157).

  When the initial value update flag is set, the CPU 56 determines to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. When the initial value update flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the initial value change flag is set (step S222). That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the initial value of the count value is currently changed (that is, whether or not it is changed to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560).

  When the initial value change flag is set (that is, when the initial value is currently changed based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560), the CPU 56 uses the initial value input to the counter 521 as the game control. The value based on the ID number of the microcomputer 560 is returned to the original value (for example, “1”) (step S223). Then, the CPU 56 resets the initial value change flag (step S224) and ends the initial value update process.

  If the initial value change flag is not set (that is, the initial value is not currently changed), the CPU 56 changes the initial value input to the counter 521 to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. (Step S225). In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the initial value input to the counter 521 is calculated by adding a predetermined value “100” to the ID number “100”. Change to the value “200”. Further, for example, the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100”. Then, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag (step S226) and ends the initial value update process.

  When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, in step S225, the CPU 56 sets the random number read from one random number circuit (for example, the 12-bit random number circuit 503a) as a predetermined value as an ID number. The initial value input to the counter 521 may be obtained. Then, the CPU 56 may use a random number read from the other one (for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 503b) as a random number for determining the big hit.

  When the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S225, the CPU 56 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and the value set based on the ID number is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the maximum random number. If the CPU 56 determines that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the CPU 56 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521 with a predetermined value (for example, updates with the predetermined value “0”). do not do). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If it is determined in step S220 that the notification signal is in the OFF state, or if it is determined in step S221 that the initial value update flag is not set, the CPU 56 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521. Then, the random number circuit initial value update process is finished as it is, and the routine goes to Step S23.

  Next, the count value permutation change process (step S26) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the count value permutation change process. The CPU 56 performs the count value permutation change process by executing the process according to the count value permutation change program 554. In the count value permutation change process, the CPU 56 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S241). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set (step S242). That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the setting for changing the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value has been made in the random number circuit setting process (see step S158). Check.

  When the count value permutation change flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 is changed when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Then, the CPU 56 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536 (step S243). That is, the CPU 56 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the permutation of the count values C input to the random value storage circuit 531 by writing the count value permutation change data “01h”.

  As described above, in the count value permutation changing process, when the random number is updated to a predetermined final value, the permutation of the count value updated by the counter 521 is changed, so that the randomness generated by the random number circuit 503 is more random. Can be improved.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S27) in the main process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). In the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 is turned on if the start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning port 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on, that is, a game. If a start winning that causes the ball to win the start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S311), the start opening switch passing process (step S312) is performed, and then any one of steps S300 to S309 is performed according to the internal state. Perform the process. If the start port switch 14a is not turned on, an interrupt counter described later is cleared (step S313), and then any one of steps S300 to S309 is performed according to the internal state.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored (the number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. Also, if the count value of the pending storage number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state, and whether or not the display result of the variable symbol special display is set as the specific display result (whether it is a big hit) Or not). A big hit flag is set for a specific display result. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Variations of special symbol variable display (corresponding to the variable time here), multiple types of variations determined in advance according to the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern (one of the random numbers for display) extracted at the start winning Select from patterns. In addition, information (variation pattern command, that is, variable display pattern command) for instructing a variation pattern is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) according to step S302.

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the special symbol process timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) Step S303 (3 in this example)

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. Or, when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a small hit symbol, the internal state is updated so that (special symbol process flag) shifts to step S307. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening is changed to one of a first state (open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player. In this embodiment, when the game state shifts to the big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the big prize opening to the first state for a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Control to end by doing.

  Also, in this embodiment, so-called sudden probability change big hits (the big hits that give a special effect to the player as if the game state has suddenly shifted to the probability change state, instead of progressing each round in order) May be transferred to. When the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly shifts to the probable big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the winning prize opening for a period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times (for example, twice). The game is terminated by changing to the first state in at least one of the above, and after the sudden probability change big hit game state, the probability that the special symbol stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol is improved from the normal state, and the game medium enters the start area Control is performed to a first high-probability state in which the ease of operation is the same as the normal state. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 has the same probability as the first high probability state that the special symbol stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state, and the game from the first high probability state to the start area You may make it control to the 2nd high probability state set so that a medium may approach easily. Note that the state where the game medium is set to be easy to enter the start area specifically means that the frequency at which the start winning opening 14 is opened is increased and the ease of winning the game ball is improved as compared to the normal state. It is a state (high base state). Further, in this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state of the normal probability change big hit (15 round probability change big hits other than sudden probability change), the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol after the big hit gaming state ends is the first. It is controlled to a second high probability state that is the same as the high probability state and that is set so that the game medium is more likely to enter the starting area than the first high probability state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game may be shifted to a so-called small hit (performing each stage where the special winning opening is suddenly opened only for a short time instead of proceeding in turn for each round). is there. When transitioning to the small hit gaming state, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is terminated by changing the big prize opening to the first state for the same period as the second gaming state and the same number of times as the second gaming state. Control is performed so that the gaming state immediately before the start of the small hit gaming state is continued as the gaming state after the gaming state ends.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big prize opening. To do. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) according to step S305. It should be noted that the pre-winner opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting a round, the pre-opening pre-opening processing is also a process of starting a big hit game. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 realizes a specific game state transition control means by executing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening. Further, the specific game state transition control means may be defined as being realized by the game control microcomputer 560 executing the jackpot display process. That is, the time point when the specific gaming state is started may be the time point when the effect for notifying the occurrence of the big hit is started. In this case, the specific time from the point in time when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result on the variable display device 9 corresponds to the period during which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  Large winning opening open process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306.

  Big hit end process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  Pre-opening process for small hits (step S307: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, Etc.), and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big winning opening. The execution time of the process during the hit release is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) according to step S308. However, in the case of starting a round, the process for opening a small hit game is a process for starting a small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S307. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) according to step S309.

  Small hit end processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Control to end the small hit gaming state. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 27, commands 8000 (H) to 800B (H) are effect control commands (variation for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 800B (H), the variable display device 9 controls the variable display device 9 to start variable display of the decorative symbols.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (offset specifying command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be a probability variation jackpot.

  The command 8C03 (H) specifies that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a probable big hit symbol, and an effect control command (round) that specifies that the probable change promotion effect is executed during the round of 15 rounds of big hit game. Command with probability change promotion with medium probability change promotion). The command 8C04 (H) specifies that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a probable big hit symbol, and an effect control command (special jackpot end) specifies that the probable change promotion effect is to be executed after the end of the 15 round big hit game. The command is a probability change jackpot command with a later change promotion). Command 8C05 (H) specifies that the display result of variable display device 9 is a probability change jackpot symbol, and specifies that a probability change promotion effect is executed during the round of 15 rounds of jackpot game and after the end of jackpot game. This is a production control command (a probability variation jackpot command with a probability variation promotion).

  “Probability promotion effect” means that, when it is determined in advance that the probability variable symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9, the left, middle and right decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 are the same non-probable variable symbol This is an effect that is derived and displayed in a state where all the probability variation symbols are common (or may be off-line symbols), and notifies whether or not to be promoted to a probability variation jackpot after the jackpot game is started. In this embodiment, the probable promotion effect is performed during the big hit game round and the ending effect after the big hit game ends. Hereinafter, the probability change promotion effect executed during the round of jackpot game is also referred to as promotion effect during round, and the probability change promotion effect executed in the ending effect after the end of jackpot game is also referred to as promotion effect after jackpot. Further, in this embodiment, executing the probability variation promotion effect in the ending effect at the end of the big hit game is also referred to as executing the probability change promotion effect after the big hit. The detailed contents of the probable promotion effect will be described later.

  The command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command (abrupt probability variation big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a sudden probability variation big hit. The command 8C07 (H) is an effect control command (small hit designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a small hit, the case where it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is suddenly a probable big hit, and The same symbol is derived and displayed. For example, the same symbol “123” is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol when it is determined that it is a probable big hit and when it is determined that it is a small hit.

  The following is the outlier designation command, normal jackpot designation command, probability variation jackpot designation command, probability variation jackpot designation command with probability variation promotion during round, probability variation jackpot designation command with probability variation promotion after jackpot termination, probability variation jackpot designation command with probability variation promotion, sudden probability variation jackpot designation command The small hit designation command may be referred to as a display result command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for instructing stop of variable display of ornamental symbols. The command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) transmitted when the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501 (H) is a state where the gaming state is in a high probability state after a probable big hit. Is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) transmitted when Command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (sudden probability change state background designation command) transmitted when the gaming state is in a high probability state after sudden probability change big hit. Hereinafter, the effect control commands 9500 (H) to 9502 (H) are referred to as background designation commands. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the type of background to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in accordance with the received background designation command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command AXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Of these, A000 (H) is an effect control command (normal jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a normal jackpot game. A001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change big hit start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of probability variation big hit game. A002 (H) is an effect control command (sudden probability change big hit start designation command: third fanfare designation command) for designating the start of sudden probability change big hit game. A003 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that a probability variation jackpot game is started and that a probability variation promotion effect is executed during the round of the jackpot game (a probability variable jackpot start designation command with a probability variation promotion during a round: fourth fanfare designation) Command). A 004 (H) is an effect control command (starting with a promising change promotion with a promising change promotion with a promising change promotion command specifying the start of a promising big hit game, and executing the promising promotion effect in the ending effect after the big hit game ends: 5 fanfare designation command). A005 (H) is an effect control command (specifying a probability variable jackpot start specification with a probability variable promotion) that specifies that a probability variable jackpot game is to be started and that a probability variation promotion effect is to be executed during the bonnet game round and after the end of the jackpot game. Command: sixth fanfare designation command).

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a big winning opening) that designates display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  A300 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game. A301 (H) is an effect control command (probability variation jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of probability variation jackpot game. A302 (H) is an effect control command (sudden probability variable jackpot end designation command: third ending designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot game. A303 (H) is an effect control command for specifying that the probability change jackpot game is to be ended and that the probability change promotion effect is executed during the round of the jackpot game (the probability variable jackpot end specification command with the probability change promotion during the round: fourth ending specification) Command). A304 (H) is an effect control command for specifying that the probability change jackpot game is to be ended and that the probability change promotion effect is executed in the ending effect after the jackpot game ends (the probability variable jackpot end designation command with the probability change promotion after the jackpot end: No. 5 ending designation command). A305 (H) is an effect control that specifies that the probability variation jackpot game is ended, that the probability variation promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game round, and that the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the ending effect after the jackpot game ends. Command (probability jackpot end designation command with probability variation promotion: sixth ending designation command).

  A600 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command: seventh fanfare specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information specifying command) for specifying the number of reserved memories. Of these, the command C000 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 0 specifying command) that specifies that the number of reserved memories is zero. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 1 specifying command) for specifying that the number of reserved memories is 1. Command C002 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 2 designation command) for designating that the number of reserved memories is two. Command C003 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 3 specifying command) that specifies that the number of reserved memories is three. Command C004 (H) is an effect control command (effect storage information 4 specifying command) that specifies that the number of reserved memories is four.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed presentation control command related to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the presentation control board 80.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this embodiment. In FIG. 29, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern of 2-byte configuration. “Time” indicates the variation time (variable display period of identification information) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol.

  In this example, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is whether it is out of place, whether it is a big hit, whether to reach, the reach mode when reaching, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol A plurality of types are prepared according to the difference in various production modes, such as whether to execute a re-lottery effect, whether to suddenly make a big hit or not, and whether to make a small hit. In this embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variation pattern in which the EXT data is “00 (H)” to “03 (H)” is a variation pattern that is used at the time of deviation variation. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “04 (H)” to “09 (H)” is a fluctuation pattern used when the big hit fluctuation (including both the probable big hit and the normal big hit). Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “0A (H)” is a fluctuation pattern used at the time of sudden probability variation big hit. Further, the variation pattern whose EXT data is “0B (H)” is a variation pattern used at the time of a small hit. Of the variation patterns used in the big hit variation, the variation patterns whose EXT data is “07 (H)” to “09 (H)” specify that the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. This is a fluctuation pattern.

  The “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach mode. “Reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach mode different from “Reach B” and “Reach C”. “Reach B” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “reach A” and “reach C”. “Reach C” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “reach B” and “reach C”. Further, the difference in reach mode means that a change mode (speed, rotation direction, etc.), a character, or the like of a different mode appears in the reach change time.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 29, a variation pattern is used in which the variation time is the same 10 seconds when suddenly probable big hit and small hit are decided. By doing so, the special symbol is displayed in a variably displayed state for the same 10 seconds both in the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is suddenly probable only by looking at the change display. can do. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 also displays the decorative pattern on the variable display device 9 for the same 10 seconds on the basis of the fact that the variable pattern command for suddenly changing the big hit or the small hit is received. Let In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the variation display of the decorative pattern using the same mode (for example, the same background color) in the case of the sudden probability change big hit and the small hit.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process (step S312). In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start winning memory number indicated by the start winning counter (or the start winning memory number stored in the special figure holding memory 570) to 4 which is the maximum value. It is confirmed whether it has reached (step S3201). If the start winning memorized number has not reached 4, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter indicating the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed (step S3201a). That is, the CPU 56 executes a process of counting the number of times that the timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, by executing step S3201a, the CPU 56 counts up an interrupt counter that indicates the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed. When the value of the interrupt count counter is incremented by 1, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the number of executions of the timer interrupt process indicated by the interrupt execution count counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) (step S3202). ). Then, after the game ball has won the start winning opening 14, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the interrupt execution counter has reached a predetermined number. When it is detected that the game ball has won the start winning opening 14 (that is, when YES is determined in step S3202), the CPU 56 resets the interrupt execution counter.

  The value set in advance as the predetermined number of times in step S3202 is determined as follows. As described above, the timer circuit 534 of the random number circuit 503 measures the time that the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the start port switch 14a, and detects that the measurement time has reached a predetermined period, Write numerical value capture data “01h”. In this embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) measured by the timer circuit 534 is a period in which a predetermined number of timer interrupt processes are executed (for example, when the timer interrupt process for every 2 ms is executed three times). The predetermined number (for example, 3 times) used in step S3202 is set so as to be shorter than 6 ms). By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the random number value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. It is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the circuit 531 from being read again. The timer circuit 534 does not measure the input time of the winning detection signal SS, but the CPU 56 measures the input time of the winning detection signal SS and writes the random value fetch data “01h” to the random value fetch register 539. May be.

  If the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached the predetermined number, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the count number of the start prize counter to increase the start prize memory number by one (step S3203). Then, the CPU 56 outputs the output control signal SC to the random value storage circuit 531 of the specified random number circuit 503, and controls the random value storage circuit 531 to be in a readable (enable) state (step S3204).

  The CPU 56 reads the random R value stored as the random number value from the random number value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (step S3205). Further, the CPU 56 stores the read random R value in the storage area (special symbol determination buffer (special symbol holding memory 570)) corresponding to the value of the start winning memorized number (step S3206). When the CPU 56 stores the value of the random R in the buffer area, the CPU 56 stops outputting the output control signal SC to the random value storage circuit 531 and controls the random value storage circuit 531 to be unreadable (disabled) (step). S3207). Further, the CPU 56 resets the interrupt execution number counter (step S3208). Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of the random R stored in the predetermined buffer area at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation memory 570 (step S3209).

  Further, the CPU 56 extracts values of random numbers (software random numbers) such as determination random numbers and display random numbers, and stores them in a storage area (special symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the start winning memory number ( Step S3210). Note that extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 transmits an effect storage information designation command in accordance with the value of the start prize storage counter updated in step S3203 (step S3211). In this case, the CPU 56 transmits an effect storage information 1 designation command when the updated number of reserved memories is 1, and transmits an effect storage information 2 designation command when the number of reserved memories after update is 2. Then, when the updated stored memory number is 3, an effect storage information 3 designation command is transmitted, and when the updated stored memory number is 4, an effect memory information 4 designation command is transmitted.

  If the start winning memorization is stored in step S3201, but the maximum value of 4 has been reached, and if the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has not reached the predetermined number in step S3202, the start port switch passing process is terminated.

  As described above, the timer interrupt process has been executed a predetermined number of times in reading the random R from the random value storage circuit 531 in the starting port switch passing process (that is, continued while the timer interrupt process is executed a predetermined number of times). The random number is read from the random value storage circuit 531 on the condition that the winning detection signal SS is input). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the value of the random number stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. Further, it is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the previous random number value storage circuit 531 from being read again.

  Next, the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process will be described. 31 and 32 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) can start the variation of the special symbol (for example, the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value indicating step S300). (If it is present) (step S1501), the value of the start winning memorized number (holding memorized number) is confirmed (step S1502). Specifically, the count value of the start winning storage counter is confirmed. The case where the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a case where the symbol is not changed in the variable display device 9 and is not in the big hit game.

  If it is not possible to start fluctuation in step S1501, or if the number of reserved memories is 0 in step S1502, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the demonstration display flag is set (step S1503). ). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration is being executed. If it is set, the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is. If not set, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a demonstration display flag (step S1504), and transmits a demonstration display command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1505).

  If the number of reserved memories is not 0 in step S1502, each random number value (random R, random numbers for determination, display random numbers) stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 is read, and the random number buffer of the RAM 55 In addition to storing in the area (step S1506), the value of the reserved storage number is decreased by 1 (the value of the start winning storage counter is decreased by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S1507). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes. In other words, in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of shifting the contents of each storage area each time a variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Note that the effect control microcomputer 560 performs the effect control command control process (step S1507) based on the update of the value of the start winning memory counter (the value of the predetermined work area provided in the RAM is updated). In S29), an effect storage information designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the effect storage information 0 designation command when the updated number of reserved memories is 0, and when the updated number of reserved memories is 1, the effect storage information. 1 designation command is transmitted. When the number of reserved storage after update is 2, an effect storage information 2 designation command is transmitted. When the number of reserved storage after update is 3, the production storage information 3 designation command is transmitted. Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S1508), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1509). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value.

  If it is decided not to win (N in step S1510), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S1515) and executes the small hit determination module (step S1515). S1516). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a big hit is made when the big hit determination random number matches a predetermined small hit determination value. In this embodiment, a case where a common jackpot determination random number is used for the case of determining whether to win or not and a case of determining whether to win or not will be described. The microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not to make a small hit by using a small random number for determination only for small hits (random number for small hit determination).

  When it is determined that a small hit is made (step S1517), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag (step S1518). It should be noted that the small hit flag is a flag indicating that it has been determined to be a small hit. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an effect designation value indicating a small hit in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1519). If it is decided not to make a small hit, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an effect designation value indicating a loss in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1520). Then, control goes to a step S1521.

  In step S1521, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1521). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether a high probability flag and a high base flag, which will be described later, are set, and if both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set, A probability state background designation command (command 9501 (H) shown in FIG. 27) is transmitted, and if only the high probability flag is set, a sudden probability change state background designation command (command 9502 (H) shown in FIG. 27) is transmitted. . If neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H) shown in FIG. 27) is transmitted. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value indicating the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S1522).

  If it is determined in step S1510 that a big hit is made, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a big hit flag (step S1511). The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it has been decided to make a big hit. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 loads a special jackpot symbol setting table for determining a special symbol stop symbol and determining a jackpot type when it is determined to be a big jackpot (step S1512). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 reads from the random number storage buffer the jackpot determination random number for determining the special symbol stop symbol and the jackpot type when the jackpot is determined (step S1513). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the special symbol stop symbol and jackpot type based on the jackpot symbol setting table and the jackpot determining random number (step S1514).

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol setting table. As shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot symbol setting table includes a random number of the jackpot determination random number, a special symbol stop symbol, and a jackpot type in association with each other. In step S1514, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the special symbol stop symbol as one of “0” to “99” according to the setting content shown in FIG. 33 according to the random number of the jackpot determination random number. . Further, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the type of jackpot, which is a normal jackpot, a probable variation jackpot, or a sudden probability variation jackpot, according to the setting contents shown in FIG. 33, according to the random number value of the jackpot determination random number. Furthermore, in the case of the probability variation big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the probability variation promotion effect is executed and the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect (during round, ending, or round) according to the setting contents shown in FIG. Both ending and ending).

  If the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot (N in step S1523), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the determined jackpot type is a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S1524). If it is a sudden probability variation big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a sudden probability variation big hit flag indicating that it has been determined that the sudden probability variation big hit is determined (step S1524a), and an effect designation value indicating the sudden probability variation big hit. Is set in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1525). If it is not suddenly probable big hit, an effect designation value indicating a normal big hit is set in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1526).

  If the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a probability variation jackpot flag indicating that the probability variation jackpot has been determined (step S1527). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the probability variation promotion effect (step S1528). The designated value is set in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1529).

  When performing the probable promotion effect, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the execution timing of the probable promotion effect is in the big hit game round (step S1530). If the big hit game is in a round, the game control microcomputer 560 indicates the execution of the promotion effect during the round and sets the production designation value indicating the probability variation big hit in the production symbol information buffer (step S1531). In addition, an in-round promotion flag indicating that the in-round promotion effect is executed is set (step S1532).

  If the big hit game is not in the round in step S1530, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect is in the ending after the big hit game ends (step S1533). If the ending after the end of the big hit game is in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 indicates the execution of the promotion effect after the big hit and sets an effect designation value indicating the probability variation big hit in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1534). In addition, a post-hit promotion flag indicating that the post-hit promotion effect is executed is set (step S1535).

  If the ending after the big hit game is not ended in step S1533, the game control microcomputer 560 shows the execution of both the promotion effect during the round and the promotion effect after the big hit, and an effect designation value indicating the probability variation jackpot in the effect symbol information buffer. Set (step S1536). Further, a promotion flag indicating that both the promotion effect during round and the promotion effect after jackpot are executed is set (step S1537).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to step S1521, transmits a background display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1521), and changes the value of the special symbol process flag to the variation pattern setting process (step S301). ) To a value indicating () (step S1522).

  In this embodiment, the case of determining the jackpot type at once using the jackpot symbol setting table in step S1514 has been described. However, the jackpot type is determined separately using different random numbers. It may be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to make a probability change using a probability variation determination random number, and whether to suddenly change the probability using a probability variation determination random number separately from the probability variation determination random number. May be determined. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect using the probability change promotion effect determination random number.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S201). When the big hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines to use the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S204). If the big hit flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S202). If the small hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines to use a small hit variation pattern (variation pattern in which the EXT data shown in FIG. 29 is “0B (H)”). If the small hit flag is not set, it is determined to use the deviation variation pattern determination table (step S205).

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (“04 (H)” to “0 A (H)”) selected in advance for the big hit shown in FIG. 29 are set, and a plurality of determinations are made for each variation pattern. A value has been assigned. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, variation patterns (“00 (H)” to “03 (H)”) selected at the time of deviation shown in FIG. The judgment value is assigned.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and uses the variation pattern determination table for big hits or the variation pattern determination table for loss based on the read value of the variation pattern determination random number. A pattern variation pattern is determined (step S206). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the decorative design executed by the variable display device 9. If it is determined that a sudden probability change big hit is included in the big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the fluctuation pattern for the sudden probability change big hit (the EXT data shown in FIG. 29 is “0A (H)”). (Variation pattern) is used.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a variation pattern designation value corresponding to the determined variation pattern (variation time) in the effect symbol variation pattern buffer (step S207). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the command transmission table in the pointer (step S208). The game control microcomputer 560 sets the change pattern designation value in the effect symbol change pattern buffer in step S207, and sets the head address of the command transmission table in the pointer in step S208. In the command control process, first, a variation pattern command is transmitted based on the variation pattern designation value set in the effect symbol variation pattern buffer corresponding to the head address of the command transmission table. Then, in the effect control command control process, by adding the address indicating the command transmission table one by one, command transmission is performed in the order of the variation pattern command, the display result command, and the effect storage information command according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. Will do.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S209). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S302 (step S210).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0), and if it has not expired (N in step S352), it remains as it is. The special symbol variation process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S303 (step S353).

  FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are flowcharts showing the special symbol variation stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stopped symbol (step S1301). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a decoration symbol variation stop designation command (8F00 (H)) for designating stoppage of variation of the ornament symbol in the variable display device 9 to the effect control microcomputer 100 ( Step S1302). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1303).

  If the big hit flag is set (Y in step S1303), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (step S1304). If it is set, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the sudden probability variation big hit symbol on the big prize opening control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening, and then suddenly changes the big winning game. Is set (step S1307) for the execution time (fanfare effect) for informing the player that the player will start (sudden probability change big hit display time (for example, 5 seconds)). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a sudden probability variation big hit start designation command (third fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1306). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S304 (step S1316).

  If the sudden change bonus game flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the jackpot symbol after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the bonus game control timer for measuring the time for controlling the opening / closing of the bonus game. An execution time (big hit display time (for example, 3 seconds)) of an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the game is started is set (step S1307). Note that the same display time may be set for a normal big hit (15 round big hit) and a sudden probability variation big hit (2 round big hit).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the promotion flag during round is set (step S1308). If it is set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a probability change jackpot start specifying command (fourth fanfare specification command) with a probable change promotion during the round to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1309). Then, control goes to a step S1315.

  If the promotion flag during the round is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the post-hit promotion flag is set (step S1310). If set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a probability variation jackpot start designation command (fifth fanfare designation command) with probability variation promotion after the jackpot end to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1311). Then, control goes to a step S1315.

  If the post-hit promotion flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the promotion flag is set (step S1312). If set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a probability variation jackpot start designation command (sixth fanfare designation command) with probability variation promotion to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1313). Then, control goes to a step S1315.

  If the promotion flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a probability variation big hit start designation command (second fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1314). Then, control goes to a step S1315.

  In step S1315, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the probability variation flag and the high base flag (step S1315). The internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S304 (step S1316).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S1303, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S1317). If not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S1321).

  If the small hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the small hit display time in the big winning opening control timer for measuring the time for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening (step S1318). In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the same time as the sudden probability change big hit display time (for example, 5 seconds) in the big winning opening control timer. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a small hitting start designation command (seventh fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1319). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (step S1320).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value is not 0 (N in step S402), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), it is confirmed whether or not the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (step S403).

  If the sudden probability big hit flag is not set (N in Step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 specifies the display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big winning opening (during the round). Control to transmit the middle display command (A1XX (H)) to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S404). The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S405) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S406). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. In step S405, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on / off the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. The content related to off is set according to the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area of the output port in the solenoid output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Further, the maximum time (round time for 15 rounds) in which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big round of 15 rounds is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S407). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (step S411).

  When the probability variation jackpot flag is suddenly set in step S403 (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a special winning opening open display command (A1XX (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S408). Further, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening (step S409), and the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 (step S410). In addition, the maximum time for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of two rounds (round time for two rounds) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S411). The round time for two rounds is an extremely short time, for example, 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in the case of two rounds of big hit (suddenly promising big hit), there is a low possibility that a game ball will win a big winning opening during the round. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (step S412).

  FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are flowcharts showing the special prize opening process during the special symbol process (step S305). In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S421).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S422). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S422), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S423). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S423), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is ON (Y in step S423), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S424). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S426). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S426), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S422) or the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S427). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability big hit flag is set (step S429). If the sudden probability big hit flag is set (Y in Step S429), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the round number counter is 2 (Step S430).

  If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (N in step S430), the game control microcomputer 560 designates a display state corresponding to the number of rounds after the special winning opening is opened (after the end of the round). Control is performed to transmit the display designation command (A2XX (H)) after the special winning opening is opened to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S432). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for two rounds) in the big winning prize control timer (two rounds). In step S433), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S304 (pre-winner pre-opening process) (step S434). Note that the interval time for two rounds is an extremely short time, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S430), the gaming control microcomputer 560 specifies an ending 3 command (A302 (H)) for displaying the end of the probable big hit of 2 rounds. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S431). Then, the execution time (big hit end time) of the effect (ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the big hit is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S448), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set in step S306 (the big hit end process). ) To a value corresponding to () (step S449). In step S448, when the game control microcomputer 560 has decided to execute the probability change promotion effect in the ending effect after the big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 compares it with the case where it is determined not to execute the probability change promotion effect. Long execution time is set as jackpot end time. For example, the jackpot end time (5 seconds) may be set when the probability change promotion effect is not executed, or the jackpot end time (10 seconds) may be set when it is determined to execute the probability change promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to secure an execution period for executing the probable promotion effect in the ending effect after the end of the big hit.

  If the sudden probability big hit flag is not set (N in Step S429), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (Step S435). When the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in step S435), the game control microcomputer 560 specifies the display state corresponding to the number of rounds after the big winning opening is opened (after the round is finished). Control is performed to transmit the display designation command (A2XX (H)) after opening the mouth to the microcomputer 100 for effect control (step S436). Then, a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S437), and the special symbol process flag is set. Is updated to a value corresponding to step S304 (pre-opening process for the big prize opening) (step S438). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  If the value of the round number counter is 15 (Y in step S435), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the round promotion flag is set (step S439). If it is set, a probability variation jackpot end designation command (fourth ending designation command) with a probability variation promotion during round is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S440).

  If the promotion flag during the round is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the post-hit promotion flag is set (step S441). If it has been set, a probabilistic jackpot end designation command (fifth ending designation command) with probability variation promotion after jackpot termination is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S442).

  If the big hit promotion flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the promotion flag is set (step S443). If it is set, a probability variation jackpot end designation command with probability variation promotion (sixth ending designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S444).

  If the promotion flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S445). If it is set, a probability variation big hit end designation command (second ending designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S446). If not set, a normal jackpot end designation command (first ending designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S447).

  After that, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the big hit end time in the big winning opening control timer (step S448) and sets the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with step S306 (big hit end processing) in the same manner as described above. The updated value is updated (step S449). In step S448, when the game control microcomputer 560 has decided to execute the probability change promotion effect in the ending effect after the big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 compares it with the case where it is determined not to execute the probability change promotion effect. Long execution time is set as jackpot end time. For example, the jackpot end time (5 seconds) may be set when the probability change promotion effect is not executed, or the jackpot end time (10 seconds) may be set when it is determined to execute the probability change promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to secure an execution period for executing the probable promotion effect in the ending effect after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S451). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0 (step S452). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S452), the process is ended as it is.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S452), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S453). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set (Y in step S453), a high probability flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state is set (step S454) and a high base flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state is set. Set (step S455). In other words, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probable change state, the transition to the high probability state where the probability that the special symbol stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol after the jackpot game ends is improved from the normal state. At the same time, the game is shifted to a high base state in which the ease of winning a game ball to the start winning opening 14 is improved from the normal state.

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is suddenly set (step S456). If set, a high probability flag is set (step S457). That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is suddenly changed to the probabilistic change state, the state is changed only to the high probability state and not changed to the high base state (the first high probability state described above). Note that even if the game state suddenly shifts to the probability change state, the game state may shift to the high probability state and may shift to the high base state. In this case, in step S457, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a high probability flag and also sets a high base flag. In the case of suddenly changing to a high probability state and also to a high base state in the probability variation state, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control so that only the big hit determination is performed but not the small hit determination.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the big hit flag (step S458). If the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S459). Further, when the round promotion flag, the big hit promotion flag, and the promotion flag are set, the round round promotion flag, the big hit promotion flag, and the promotion flag are reset (step S460).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the internal state (value of the special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (special symbol normal process) (step S461).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hit release pre-processing (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the pre-opening process for small hits, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S1401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S1402). If the value is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to open the big prize opening (step S1403), and the round number counter The value of +1 is incremented (step S1404). In addition, the maximum time for which the big winning opening can be opened in each round in the small winning of two rounds (the round time for two rounds of small winning) is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S1405). In step S1405, the round time is set to the same time as the round time set in the sudden probability variation big hit. Moreover, the round time for small hits is an extremely short time, for example, 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in the small round of 2 rounds, there is a low possibility that a game ball will win a big winning opening during the round. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S308 (step S1406).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S1421). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S1422), and when the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (in step S1422). N) By checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has been won in the big winning opening (step S1423). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S1423), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is ON (Y in step S1423), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S1424). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1425). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number (N in Step S1425), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1422) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1425), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S1426). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S1427). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S1428).

  If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (N in step S1428), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the next winning round after the round ends in the small winnings of 2 rounds to the big prize opening control timer. (Time interval for two rounds) is set (step S1429), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (pre-processing for small hit release) (step S1430). Note that the interval time for two rounds is an extremely short time, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S1428), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the small winning end time in the special winning a prize opening control timer (step S1431), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (small hit end processing) (step S1432).

  In this embodiment, the case where the opening and closing of the big prize opening is controlled based on the number of rounds in the small hit is shown. However, the control method of the big winning opening at the small hit is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to things. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the data indicating the opening time and closing time of the big winning opening at the time of a small hit, and sets the big winning opening at the small hit based on the data indicating the set opening time and closing time. You may control. In this case, for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 performs two rounds of small hits, the first big winning opening release time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in step S1405 in the small hit release pre-processing. Is set in the first control timer. In addition, the closing time (for example, 2 seconds) of the big prize opening after the opening of the first big prize opening ends is set in the second control timer. Also, the opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the second big prize opening is set in the third control timer. In the small hit release process (see step S308), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the first control timer by one, and if the first control timer is up, drives the solenoid to win a big prize. The mouth is closed (see step S1426. In this case, the value of the special symbol process flag is not updated). Next, the second control timer is decremented by 1 in the small hit release process, and if the second control timer has timed out, the solenoid is driven to open the big prize opening (also in this case, the special symbol process flag) The value of is not updated.) Further, the third control timer is decremented by 1 in the small hit release process, and if the third control timer has timed out, the solenoid is driven to close the big prize opening (see step S1426). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit end process (see step S1432).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S309) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end processing, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S1451). Note that the value of the special winning opening control timer is set in the process of step S1431 during the small hit release process. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S1452). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1452), the process is terminated.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1452), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the small hit flag (step S1453). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the internal state (the value of the special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (special symbol normal process) (step S1454).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control command control process. In the effect control command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not there is an effect control command to be transmitted (step S331). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an effect control command is set at the address of the command transmission table pointed to by the pointer. If not, the game control microcomputer 560 ends the process. If there is an effect control command to be transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the command data in the command transmission table pointed to by the pointer (step S332).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a command transmission table. As shown in FIG. 46, the command transmission table includes MODE data of the fluctuation pattern command, EXT data of the fluctuation pattern command, MODE data of the display result command, EXT data of the display result command, MODE data of the effect storage information command, The stored information command EXT data and the end code are set in this order. Therefore, in this embodiment, command transmission is performed in the order of the variation pattern command, the display result command, and the effect storage information command by executing the effect control command control process according to the command transmission table shown in FIG.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes command transmission processing for transmitting the loaded command data 1 (step S333). Here, first, the MODE data of the variation pattern command is transmitted according to the command transmission table shown in FIG.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the value indicating the command transmission table (step S334). Therefore, the command data 2 area of the second byte is designated. The game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the command data 2 at the address of the command transmission table pointed to by the pointer (step S335). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 saves the address of the command transmission table (the contents of the pointer as the transmission signal instruction means) on the stack or the like (step S336).

  Further, it is confirmed whether or not the value of bit 7 (work area reference bit) of the command data 2 is “0” (step S337). If not 0, the head address of the command extended data address table is set in the pointer (step S338), and the address is calculated by adding the values of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the pointer (step S339). Then, the data of the area pointed to by the address is loaded (step S340).

  In the command extension data address table, EXT data that can be sent to the electrical component control means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100) is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference bit is “ If “0”, the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the command extension data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes command transmission processing for transmitting the loaded command data 2 (step S341). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the command transmission table (step S342), and adds 1 to the value indicating the command transmission table (step S343).

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern designation value is set in the effect symbol variation pattern buffer in step S207, and the head address of the command transmission table is set in the pointer in step S208. Then, in the effect control command control process, based on the fact that the start address of the command transmission table is set in the pointer, first, the variation pattern designation set in the effect symbol variation pattern buffer corresponding to the start address of the command transmission table A variation pattern command is transmitted depending on the value. In this embodiment, in the special symbol normal process, the effect designation value is set in the effect symbol information buffer in steps S1519, S1520, S1525, S1526, S1529, S1531, S1534, and S1536. Then, in the effect control command control processing, the address indicating the command transmission table is incremented by 1 when the variation pattern command is transmitted (see steps S334 and S343), and the command is transmitted at the next timer interrupt that transmits the variation pattern command. A display result command is transmitted by the effect designation value set in the effect symbol information buffer corresponding to the address of the transmission table. In this embodiment, when it is determined in the special symbol normal process that the variation of the special symbol can be started (see step S1501), the value of the start winning memory counter is decremented by one (see step S1507). ). Then, in the effect control command control process, the address indicating the command transmission table is incremented by 1 when the display result command is transmitted (see steps S334 and S343), and the command is issued at the next timer interrupt that transmits the display result command. The effect storage information command is transmitted according to the value of the start winning storage counter corresponding to the address of the transmission table. With the above processing, according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. 46, the variation pattern command, the display result command, and the effect storage information command are transmitted in this order.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. The production control microcomputer 100 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the start interval of the effect control processing (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect mode determination processing (step S705). In the effect mode determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the effect mode of the promotion effect during the round.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (step S706). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. Further, a random display symbol determining random number for determining a left / right / right decorative symbol displayed on the variable display device 9 or a jackpot display for determining a decorative symbol jackpot symbol displayed on the variable display device 9. A random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a design determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  48 to 49 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing (step S704) in the main processing. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S1611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S1612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 800B (H)) for designating the variation pattern (step S1613), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S1614), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1615). The display result reception time timer is a timer for measuring whether or not the display result command is received within a predetermined time after receiving the variation pattern command.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (normal jackpot designation command: 8C01 (H)) that designates that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) (step S1617). ) The effect control microcomputer 100 sets a display result reception flag indicating that the display result command has been received, and sets a normal jackpot effect flag indicating that the normal jackpot has been designated (step S1618). The process proceeds to S1611.

  Further, if the received effect control command is an effect control command (probability variable big hit designation command: 8C02 (H)) that designates that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a probable big hit (step S1620), for the effect control. The microcomputer 100 sets a display result reception flag, sets a probability variation jackpot effect flag indicating that probability variation jackpot has been designated (step S1621), and proceeds to step S1611.

  In addition, the received effect control command specifies that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a probability change big hit, and an effect control command that specifies that the promotion effect during the round is executed (the probability change big hit with the probability change promotion during the round). (Designation command: 8C03 (H)) (step S1622), the production control microcomputer 100 sets the display result reception flag and also sets the probability variation big hit production flag indicating that the probability variation big hit is designated ( In step S1623), a probable change promotion flag is set during the round indicating that the promising promotion effect is to be executed during the round of the big hit game (step S1624), and the process proceeds to step S1611.

  In addition, the received effect control command specifies that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a probable big hit, and an effect control command for specifying that a post-hit promotion effect is executed (a probable change with a probable change promotion after the big hit is completed). If the jackpot designation command is 8C04 (H)) (step S1625), the production control microcomputer 100 sets the display result reception flag and also sets the probability variation big hit presentation flag indicating that the probability variation big hit is designated. (Step S1626) In addition, an after-hit promising change promotion execution flag indicating that the promising promotion effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the jackpot is set (step S1627), and the process proceeds to step S1611.

  The received effect control command specifies that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a probable big hit, and an effect control command (probable promote) that specifies that the promotion effect during round and the post-hit promotion effect are executed. If the probability variation jackpot designation command: 8C05 (H)) (step S1628), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result reception flag and also sets a probability variation jackpot performance flag indicating that the probability variation jackpot has been designated. Set (step S1629). In addition, a probable change promotion execution flag is set during the round of the jackpot game to indicate that the probable change promotion effect is executed (step S1630), and the jackpot end indicating that the probable change promotion effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the jackpot The post-probability change promotion execution flag is set (step S1631), and the process proceeds to step S1611.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (suddenly probable big hit designation command: 8C06 (H)) that designates that the display result of the variable display device 9 is suddenly probable big hit (step S1632) The control microcomputer 100 sets a sudden probability variation jackpot effect flag indicating that sudden probability variation jackpot has been designated (step S1633) and sets a performance period measurement timer (step S1633a). In this embodiment, as will be described later, an expectation notification effect pattern that is different from the probability variation state or the normal state when the decorative symbol variation display is performed for a predetermined period after the sudden probability variation big hit or small hit is determined. According to the above, change display is executed. The effect period measurement timer is used to measure a predetermined period during which variable display is performed according to an effect pattern different from the probability variation state or the normal state. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 100 may display the decorative symbols in a predetermined number of times in accordance with the expectation degree notification effect pattern after the sudden probability change big hit or small hit is determined. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 may set a predetermined number of times in a counter for counting the number of times the decorative symbols have changed in step S1633a. Then, every time the decorative symbol variation display is performed, the value of the counter may be decremented by one, and the decorative symbol variation display may be performed according to the expectation degree notification effect pattern until the counter value becomes zero.

  Further, if the received effect control command is an effect control command (small hit designation command: 8C07 (H)) that designates that the display result of the variable display device 9 is a small hit (step S1634), for the effect control. The microcomputer 100 sets a small hit effect flag indicating that the small hit is designated (step S1635) and sets an effect period measurement timer (step S1635a).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command designated by fanfare (fanfare command: A0XX (H)) (step S1636), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command as fanfare data in the RAM. The data is stored in the storage area (step S1637), and a fanfare flag indicating that the fanfare command has been received is set (step S1638).

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display result non-reception flag is set (step S1639). The display result non-reception flag is a flag indicating that the display result command cannot be received within a predetermined time after receiving the variation pattern command. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1611. If it is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probable big hit is specified by the fanfare command (step S1640). If designated, the round re-lottery execution flag is set (step S1641), and the stop symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is determined based on the jackpot symbol determining random number (step S1641a). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines either the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol as the jackpot symbol. In addition, the effect-controlling micro computer 100 stores the determined left / right / right decorative symbols in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM. Then, control goes to a step S1611. In this embodiment, when either a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol is determined in step S1641a, a probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a big hit symbol when a re-lottery effect is executed in the mid-land processing described later. There are cases where a non-probable variation is derived.

  If the received effect control command is an ending designation effect control command (ending command: A300 (H) to A305 (H)) (step S1642), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Are stored in the ending data storage area in the RAM (step S1643), and an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (step S1644).

  If the received command read in step S1612 is another effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1645).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the display result command is received in the command control process, the contents specified by the received display result command (normal big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, A flag indicating small hits is set (see steps S1617, S1621, S1623, S1626, S1629, S1633, and S1635). By doing so, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the contents specified by the received display result command. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the content specified by the display result command, and then clears the stored content based on the fact that the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. May be. For example, in the command control process, if the received command is a variation pattern command in step S1613, the production control microcomputer 100 saves the variation pattern (see step S1614) and is designated by the display result command. You may make it reset the flag (a normal big hit effect flag, a probability change big hit effect flag, a sudden probability change big hit effect flag, a small hit effect flag) which shows the content. According to such a configuration, when the display control command 100 cannot receive the display result command, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs variable display of the decorative design based on the content stored at the time of the previous execution of the variable display of decorative design. It is possible to prevent an erroneous display result from being displayed as a display result.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the effect mode determination process (step S705) in the main process. In the effect mode determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first confirms whether or not the probable change promotion flag during round is set (step S540). If the during-round probability change execution flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the process as it is.

  If the during-round probability change execution flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the production determined flag is set (step S541). The effect determined flag is a flag indicating that the effect mode of the promotion effect during the round has already been determined when it is determined to execute the promotion effect during the round. In this embodiment, as described later, when the effect mode of the promotion effect during the round is determined in the effect mode determination process, the effect determined flag is set in step S549. If the effect determined flag is already set in step S541, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the process as it is.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a production number determination random number for determining the production frequency of the promotion effect during the round executed during the big hit game (step S542). In this embodiment, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 executes the promotion effect during the round a plurality of times when it is determined to execute the promotion effect during the round. In other words, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the effect period of the promotion effect during the round executed within the period of the big hit game by determining the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round. Instead of determining the effect period by determining the number of effects, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the effect period of the promotion effect during the round by determining the execution time per one promotion effect during the round. May be.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation big hit production flag is set (step S543). If the probable big hit effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the probable change effect number determination table as the effect number determination table for determining the effect number of the promotion effect during the round (step) S544). If the probable big hit effect flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a normal effect number determination table as the effect number determination table for determining the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round (step S545). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round using the selected effect number determination table based on the extracted value of the effect number determination random number (step S546). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 100 selects the number of executions of the promotion effect during the round from the number of effects included in the effect number determination table.

  Specifically, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the production number determination table in association with the production times of the promotion effect during the round. Then, the number of effects associated with the determination value that matches the value of the extracted effect number determination random number is determined as the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round. An example of the effect number determination table is shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round and the round in the big hit game in which the promotion effect during the round is executed are set. FIG. 51A is a table for determining the number of times of effect change at the time of probability change for determining the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round at the time of the probability change big hit. FIG. 51B is a table for determining the number of times of normal effects for determining the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round at the time of normal big hit.

  When determining the performance period by determining the execution time per round promotion effect instead of determining the number of performances, in the table shown in FIG. A plurality of determination values may be assigned in association with the execution time.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (A), the table for determining the number of effects at the time of probability change includes 4 times and 3 times as the number of effects. In addition, as shown in FIG. 51A, when the promotion effect during the round is executed four times during the jackpot game at the time of the probability change big hit, the probability change promotion effect is executed in the rounds 9, 11, 13, and 15, respectively. The Further, when the promotion effect during the round is executed three times during the jackpot game at the time of the probable big hit, the probable promotion effect is executed in each of the rounds 11, 13, and 15. FIG. 51A shows a case where the distribution ratio is 50% in the case where the number of presentations is four times and that in the case where the number is three, respectively. The distribution rate may be different.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the normal performance number determination table includes three times and two times as the number of effects. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), when the promotion effect during the round is executed three times within the period of the big hit game during the normal big hit, the probable change promotion effect is executed in rounds 11, 13, and 15, respectively. Further, when the promotion effect during the round is usually executed twice during the big hit game at the time of the big hit, the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the rounds 10 and 15, respectively. FIG. 51B shows a case in which the distribution ratios for the case of three presentations and the case of two presentations are 50%, respectively. The distribution ratio may be different.

  In this embodiment, when the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round is determined using the effect number determination table shown in FIG. In comparison, the production period of the promotion effect during the round becomes longer (in this example, the number of productions increases). Therefore, by executing the promotion effect during the round over a long effect period, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of promotion to probability change for the player.

  In addition, when determining the production period by determining the execution time of the promotion effect during the round instead of determining the number of productions, a table for determining the production period at the time of probability change (table for determining the production period at the time of probability change) As the table, a table including an execution time longer than a table for determining a normal performance period (a normal performance period determination table) may be used. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 100 selects an execution time for executing the promotion effect during the round from the execution times included in the effect period determination table. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 is a normal-time production including a probability variation production period determination table including execution times “2 minutes” and “1 minute”, and execution times “1 minute” and “20 seconds”. A period determining table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the execution time of the production during the round is “2 minutes” or “1 minute” when the probability variation big hit is pre-determined based on the probability variation production period determination table. Then, based on the normal performance period determination table, when it is determined in advance as a normal jackpot, the execution time of the promotion effect during the round is determined as “1 minute” or “20 seconds”. By doing so, the execution time of the promotion effect during the round is determined using the table for determining the effect period at the time of probability change. As a result, the production period of the promotion effect during the round becomes longer. The production control microcomputer 100 is not limited to the execution time shown above, and may select another time such as “3 minutes” or “30 seconds”, for example. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 is not limited to selecting from two types of execution times, and may select the execution time of the promotion effect during the round from the three types or four types of execution times. For example, the probable change effect period determining table and the normal effect period determining table include three or four execution times, and the effect controlling microcomputer 100 determines the probable change effect period determining table or the normal effect period determining time. The execution time of the promotion effect during the round may be selected from three or four types of execution times included in the table.

  Also, when determining the performance period by determining the execution time of the promotion effect during the round, the promotion effect during the round may be executed only once during the jackpot game, and the promotion effect during the round is executed a plurality of times. You may do it. When the promotion effect during the round is executed only once, the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines the execution time of the promotion effect during the round executed only once during the big hit game in step S546. When executing the promotion effect during the round a plurality of times, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines an execution time for each promotion effect during the round executed during the big hit game in step S546.

  In addition, in the table for determining the number of productions at the time of change shown in FIG. 51A, the distribution rate of 4 productions may be larger than the distribution rate of 3 productions. For example, the distribution rate of 4 productions may be 60%, and the distribution rate of 3 productions may be 40%. In addition, in the normal performance number determination table shown in FIG. 51 (B), the distribution ratio of the two performance times may be larger than the distribution ratio of the three performance times. For example, the distribution rate of 2 performances may be 60% and the distribution rate of 3 performances may be 40%. By doing so, the stage can be further differentiated between when it is determined to be a promising big hit and when it is normally set as a big hit, and the promotion stage during the round is executed over a long stage. By this, it is possible to further increase the expectation of promotion to probability change for the player.

  Further, both the effect change time determination table and the normal effect number determination table may include all of the effect times 2 to 4. In this case, the distribution ratio of the production times of 4 times is set to be larger than the distribution rate of the production times of 2 times in the probability variation production frequency determination table, and the distribution of the production times of 2 times is performed in the normal performance frequency determination table. You may make it a rate become larger than the distribution rate of 4 times of production.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, when the promotion effect during the round is executed four times, the execution round is determined as rounds 9, 11, 13, and 15, and the promotion effect during the round is executed three times. In the case where the execution round is determined as rounds 11, 13, and 15, and in the case where the promotion effect during the round is executed twice, the execution round is determined as rounds 10 and 15, as an example. The method of determining the combination is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and the execution round may be determined by another combination. For example, when the promotion effect during the round is executed four times, the execution rounds may be determined as rounds 6, 9, 12, and 15.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the decided number of productions in the production number counter (step S547), and sets the operation difficulty level for each round in which the probability variation promotion production is executed based on the decided number of productions. (Step S548). The operation difficulty level is a value indicating the degree of difficulty for the player to perform a predetermined operation in the probability variation promotion effect. Specifically, the operation difficulty level indicates, for example, the timing at which the player must operate the operation button 120 and the number of times that the operation button 120 must be repeatedly hit. Also, for example, when a gaming machine is provided with a button (no loose cross key) that outputs four types of on signals depending on which part of the top, bottom, left, and right is pressed, the operation difficulty is determined by the player using the cross key. Indicates the allowable time during which the upper, lower, left and right parts must be operated in a predetermined order.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when it is determined in advance that it will be a probable big hit, the player has been promoted to probable on the condition that the player has performed a predetermined operation during the execution of the promising promotion effect. An effect of informing the user is performed. Specifically, when the player presses the operation button 120 at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, the timing at which the meter level displayed on the variable display device 9 is maximized), it is notified that the player has been promoted to probability change. The In this case, for example, when the set operation difficulty level is high (that is, when the operation is difficult), if the operation button 120 is not accurately pressed at the maximum point of the meter displayed on the variable display device 9, it is promoted to certain change. Is controlled so as not to be notified. Further, for example, as the set operation difficulty level becomes lower (that is, the operation becomes easier), the operation button 120 is pressed between the maximum point of the meter displayed on the variable display device 9 and a point before a predetermined margin. Even if it is a case, it is controlled to notify that the probability change has been promoted. Further, for example, the speed at which the level of the meter displayed on the variable display device 9 increases or decreases may be changed according to the set operation difficulty level.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied when the execution of the probability change promotion effect is started using the variable display device 9, as will be described later. Start the promotion condition judgment timer. In this case, when the effect control microcomputer 100 detects the ON signal of the operation button 120, it checks whether or not the value of the promotion condition determination timer is included in a predetermined range. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the predetermined promotion condition is satisfied if it is included in the predetermined range, and if the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied if it is not included in the predetermined range. judge. In this embodiment, specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the predetermined range as the operation difficulty level in step S548. In this case, in step S548, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the predetermined range to be narrow when the operation difficulty level is set high, and sets the predetermined range when the operation difficulty level is set low. Set to widen.

  An example of the operation difficulty level set in step S548 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level to five levels of 1 to 5. It is assumed that the operation becomes difficult as the value of the operation difficulty level increases. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the operation difficulty level 5 indicates that the operation is most difficult, and the operation difficulty level 1 indicates that the operation is easy.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, when the number of effects of promotion effect during a round is determined to be 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 is difficult to operate in the first round (that is, round 9). The degree is set to 5, the operation difficulty level of the second round (ie, round 11) is set to 4, the operation difficulty level of the third round (ie, round 13) is set to 2, and the fourth round (ie, round 11) , Round 15) is set to 1 for the operation difficulty level. In addition, when the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round is determined to be 3, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round (that is, round 11) to 5 and sets the second round ( That is, the operation difficulty level of round 13) is set to 3, and the operation difficulty level of the third round (that is, round 15) is set to 1. In addition, when the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round is determined to be 2, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round (that is, round 10) to 4 and sets the second round ( That is, the operation difficulty level of round 15) is set to 2.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during the round executed later is set to be lower than the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during the round executed first. Therefore, even a player who is not skilled in the operation technology of the operation button 120 is likely to be able to operate at a predetermined timing as the promotion effect is repeated during the round, and the player's interest in the game is improved. Can do. In addition, even if the player is skilled in operation, since the operation difficulty level in the promotion promotion during the first round is set high, it is promoted during the round until it is notified that it has been promoted to a probable big hit. The possibility of executing the performance more than once is increased, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the case where different operation difficulty levels are set for each round is shown, but it is not always necessary to set different operation difficulty levels for each round. For example, when the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round is determined to be 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round to 5 and sets the operation difficulty level of the second round to 3. In addition to setting, the operation difficulty levels of the third and fourth rounds may be set to 1.

  Also, in this embodiment, the case where the operation difficulty level is set for each number of effects will be described. However, when the effect period is determined by determining the execution time of the promotion effect during the round, the effect control microcomputer 100 may set the operation difficulty level so that the difficulty level varies depending on the elapsed time when the promotion effect is executed during the round. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level so as to decrease as the production period of the promotion effect during the round elapses. As will be described later, for example, when the execution of the probability variation promotion effect is started using the variable display device 9, the effect control microcomputer 100 is for determining a promotion condition for determining whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. Start the timer. In this case, when the effect control microcomputer 100 detects the ON signal of the operation button 120, it checks whether or not the value of the promotion condition determination timer is included in a predetermined range. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the predetermined promotion condition is satisfied if it is included in the predetermined range, and if the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied if it is not included in the predetermined range. judge. In this case, in step S548, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the predetermined range to be narrow and sets the operation difficulty level to be low when the operation difficulty level is set high in the effect mode determination process. Is set so that the predetermined range is widened. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level so that the predetermined range becomes lower as the production period of the promotion effect during the round elapses.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect determined flag (step S549), and ends the process.

  Note that a fixed period may be set in advance as the production period (number of productions or execution time) of the promotion effect during the round. In this case, for example, in the effect mode determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a preset effect number in the effect number counter without determining steps S542 to S546 (step S547), and the operation difficulty level. May be determined (step S548). Further, when the effect period is determined by determining the execution time of the promotion effect during the round, the effect control microcomputer 100 may set a preset time as the execution time of the promotion effect during the round. .

  Further, in the effect mode determination process, the operation control microcomputer 100 does not determine the operation difficulty level for each round in which the round promotion effect is executed, but, for example, when the determination in step S1979 is No. Each time the round promotion effect is executed, the operation difficulty level may be set. Specifically, the operation difficulty level is set using a table having different operation difficulty distribution ratios depending on how many times the production is performed. In this case, the fourth operation difficulty level is selected as easy. It is easy to prepare a table that makes it easy to select a difficult item the first time.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S706) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a flag (variation pattern reception flag) indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is a command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 to receive an effect control command (any one of 8000 (H) to 800 B (H)) for designating a decorative pattern variation pattern in the variable display device 9. It is set when it has been confirmed that this has been done (see step S1615).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and to derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol) in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed. Further, when the promotion effect execution flag is set during the round, the probable promotion effect is executed according to the effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. If execution of the probability change promotion effect (promotion effect after jackpot) is specified by the ending command, the probability change promotion effect is executed in the ending effect.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  The process data shown in FIG. 54 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1811). If it is set, the flag is reset (step S1812).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received variation pattern command is a probability variation big hit / normal big hit designation (step S1813). If the probable big hit / normal big hit is not designated, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received variation pattern command is an outlier designation (step S1814). If it is specified to be off, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random symbol for determining the off symbol (step S1815), and based on the value of the random symbol for determining the off symbol, stops the left, middle, and right decorative symbols corresponding to the off symbol. The symbol is determined (step S1816). The determined decorative symbol stop symbol is stored in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM, and the symbol determined flag indicating that the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined is set (step S1817). 100 changes the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S1826).

  If the deviation is not designated in step S1814, the received variation pattern command suddenly specifies a probable big hit or small hit. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly extracts a random number for determining the probability variation design (step S1818), and stops the left, middle, and right decorative symbols corresponding to the sudden variation in probability based on the value of the random number for sudden variation variation. The symbol is determined (step S1819). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change. Then, the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM, and the symbol determined flag is set (step S1820). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S1826). In this embodiment, the combination of symbols such as “123” and “357”, which is the same as the sudden probability change, is executed even when the small hit is designated by executing the processing of steps S1818 to S1820. Will be determined.

  It should be noted that the decorative symbol stop symbol in the probability variation big hit and the decorative symbol stop symbol in the small hit may be determined based on receiving the display result command in the decorative symbol changing process described later. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a display result command designating sudden probability change jackpot, and a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” as a stop symbol of the decorative design corresponding to sudden probability change. May be determined. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” that are the same as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden change in probability based on the reception of the display result command specifying the small hit. You may decide. In this case, if the display result command cannot be received, the production control microcomputer 100 uses a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” that are the same as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change. Can be determined.

  If it is determined in step S1813 that the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is not designated, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the received variation pattern command designates execution of the re-lottery effect (step S1821). If execution of the redrawing effect is not designated, the process proceeds to step S1826. If execution of the re-lottery effect is designated, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol (step S1822). . Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S1826).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first confirms whether or not the sudden probability change big hit effect flag or the small hit effect flag is set (step S821). If set, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the production period measurement timer (step S821a), and checks whether the production period measurement timer has timed out (step S821b). If timed out, the probability variation big hit effect flag or the small hit effect flag is suddenly reset (step S821c), and the process proceeds to step S823. If not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data for notifying the degree of expectation according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S822). That is, if it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit is suddenly received, the sudden change state background designation command is received, and if it is determined that the small hit is received, the normal state background designation command is received. If it is determined that the game is a small hit, even if a normal state background designation command is received, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner using the same process data as the sudden probability change big hit. In addition, when suddenly probable big hit or small hit is determined, process data for expectation notification is selected for a predetermined period after the sudden probable big hit or small hit control ends until the production period measurement timer times out. Then, the decorative pattern variation display is executed.

  In this embodiment, as process data corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern, process data for probability change used when the game state is shifted to the probability change state, and normal data used when the game state is the normal state And the process data for notifying the degree of expectation used at the time of sudden big hit or small hit. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for probability change or the process data for normal, so that different background colors (for example, when the game state is in the normal state and in the normal state) (for example, "Red" is displayed in the probability variation state, and "blue" is displayed in the normal state), and the decorative symbol variable display is executed. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a background color (for example, “green”) different from that used when the process data for probability change and normal use is selected by selecting the process data for reporting the degree of expectation. Perform variable display of symbols. In addition, the expectation notification effect performed using the process data for expectation notification may be a special effect as long as the effect pattern is produced using an effect pattern different from the effect pattern used at normal time and probability change, For example, an effect of causing a predetermined character to appear on the display screen of the variable display device 9 without changing the decorative design may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether the gaming state is a probable change state or a normal state when performing a variable display of a decorative pattern at the sudden change big hit or small hit. Can increase the expectation that it may or may not be probable.

  If the sudden change big hit effect flag or the small hit effect flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a high probability state background designation command has been received (step S823). If it has been received, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for probability change according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S824). If not received, the production control microcomputer 100 selects normal process data according to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S825).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data 1 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step S826). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S827). For example, a control signal is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9. Further, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform various lamp on / off control. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a variation time timer (a timer corresponding to the variation time of the decorative pattern) and also starts a display result reception time measurement timer for measuring the reception time of the display result command ( Step S828). As will be described later, if the display result command cannot be received from the game control microcomputer 560 until the display result reception time measurement timer expires, the performance control microcomputer 100 receives the display result command. Judge that it failed. In step S828, for example, the display result reception time measurement timer is set with a time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the decorative symbol change until the high-speed change. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) (step S829).

  57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol changing process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the symbol determined flag is set (step S1830). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1842. In the case of the shift pattern command, the sudden probability change big hit designation or the small hit designation specified in the variation pattern command, the decorative symbol stop symbol is already determined and the symbol determined flag is set in the variation pattern command reception waiting process. (See steps S1817 and S1820), the process proceeds to step S1842.

  If the symbol determined flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the display result reception flag is set (step S1831). If not set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the display result reception time measurement timer by 1 (step S1832) and determines whether or not the display result reception time measurement timer has timed out (step S1833). ). If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S1842. If time-out has occurred, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result non-reception flag indicating that the display result command could not be received (step S1834), and the symbol used for determining the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol A normal big hit symbol determination table is selected as the determination table (step S1835). That is, since the display result command is not received even after a predetermined period (for example, the time from the start of the decorative pattern variation to the arrival of the high-speed variation) after receiving the variation pattern command, The effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the display result command has not been received.

  Also, in this embodiment, a jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots used when determining probability variation symbols (a table for determining jackpot symbol determination at the time of probability variation) and a jackpot display symbol for normal jackpots used for normal jackpots. A determination table (a normal big hit symbol determination table) is prepared in advance. A number of decision values are assigned to each probability variation symbol in the probability change big hit symbol determination table, and a plurality of decision values are assigned to each non-probability variation symbol in the normal time big hit symbol determination table. ing. In step S1831, the display result reception flag is not set and the display result reception time measurement timer is up. The case where the variation pattern command specified by the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received but the display result command reception fails. It is. For this reason, since it is known that at least either a probable big hit or a normal big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a normal big hit symbol determination table to decorate in step S1840 described later. Control is performed so as to determine a non-probable variation symbol as a symbol stop symbol.

  If the display result reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation big hit production flag is set (step S1836). If it has not been set (that is, if it is determined in advance as a normal jackpot), the process proceeds to step S1835, and a normal jackpot symbol determination table is selected.

  If the probability change big hit effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the probability change promotion execution flag during round or the probability change promotion execution flag after big hit is set. (Step S1838). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1835, and the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected. In other words, since the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the ending effect during the big hit game round or after the big hit game ends, the decorative symbol stop pattern is selected in step S1840 described later by selecting the normal big hit symbol determination table. Control to determine the non-probability variable design.

  If neither the probable change promotion execution flag during round nor the probabilistic promotion execution flag after jackpot is set, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the jackpot symbol at the time of probability change as a symbol determination table used to determine the jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol. A determination table is selected (step S1839).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a stop symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number value and the selected symbol determining table (step) S1840). In this case, when the probability change big hit symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the selected symbol determination table (for example, left middle right So that the symbols are aligned with the same odd number of symbols). In addition, when the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a non-probable variation symbol (for example, left middle right symbol) as a decorative symbol stop symbol. So that the symbols are aligned with the same even number of symbols). Then, the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM, and the symbol determined flag is set (step S1841).

  In step S1842, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S1842). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S1852).

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S1843) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S1844). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (step S1845).

  If the re-lottery execution flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data n (step S1847). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1848). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S1850). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1851).

  If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the start time of the re-lottery effect in the variation pattern recognizable from the variation pattern EXT data, and further confirms the value of the variation time timer. Thus, it is determined whether or not the time after the start of fluctuation has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (step S1846). If the start time of the re-lottery effect has not yet elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1847.

  If the time after the start of the fluctuation has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (Y in step S1846), the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the fluctuation that can be recognized from the EXT data stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area. It is determined whether the time after the start of fluctuation has passed the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect by checking the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect in the pattern and checking the value of the variation time timer (step S1853).

  If the start time of the big hit symbol determination effect has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect is being executed by checking the value of the variable time timer. (Step 1854). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the re-lottery effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the re-lottery effect is started. If the re-lottery effect is not being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data for the re-lottery effect (step S1855), and sets the process timer set value in the selected process data as the process timer. Then, the process timer is started (step S1856). Then, control of the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed in accordance with the contents of the process data of the re-lottery effect (step S1857). If the re-lottery effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1857 as it is, and according to the contents of the re-lottery effect process data, the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps). The control of the speaker 27) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1853 that the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the variable time timer to execute the jackpot symbol determination effect. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step S1858). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the big hit symbol finalizing effect is started. If the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data of the big hit symbol finalizing effect corresponding to the symbol arrangement reflecting the symbol determined in step S1840 ( Step S1859).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data in the process timer and starts the process timer (step S1863). In addition, as the process data for the big hit symbol determination effect, a plurality of process data having a symbol arrangement that can correspond to all combinations of changed symbols are prepared in advance. Then, the control of the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the content of the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect (step S1864).

  If the big hit symbol finalizing effect is being executed in step S1858, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1864 as it is and executes control of the directing device according to the content of the process data of the big hit symbol finalizing effect. .

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stopping process, first, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a decorative symbol stop symbol is displayed is set. If the stop symbol display flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1877. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S1876. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S1878. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S1870 is a stage where the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the decorative symbol stop symbol in steps S1871 to S1873 is displayed. The process moves to step S1877 without repeatedly executing the processes.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the effect control command (decoration symbol stop designation command) for instructing the variable symbol variation stop is received (step S1871). . If the decorative symbol stop designating command has been received, control is performed to stop and display the stored stop symbol (decorative symbol (offset symbol), jackpot display symbol) (step S1872).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The present invention is not limited to this, and control for stopping and displaying decorative symbols may be performed based on the time-up of the variable time timer.

  Then, in step S1872, the big hit display symbol (including the sudden probability variation big hit symbol) or the small hit symbol (however, in this example, the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol) is not displayed (that is, the outlier symbol is displayed: Step In N of S1873, the production control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (for example, when a flag corresponding to the decorative design stop designation command is set) (step S1874), and the production control process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S1875).

  In the case where a big hit symbol (including a sudden probability variation big hit symbol) or a small hit symbol is displayed in step S1872 (Y in step S1873), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S1876). It is confirmed whether or not the fanfare flag is set (step S1877). That is, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a fanfare command has been received. When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S1877), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S1878) and confirms whether or not the small hit effect flag is set (step S1878). Step S1880a). On the other hand, if the small hit effect flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit effect flag is suddenly set (step S1880b). If neither the sudden change big hit effect flag nor the small hit effect flag is set, the process data corresponding to the normal fanfare effect is selected (step S1880c). If the sudden probability change big hit effect flag is set (Y in step S1880b), process data corresponding to the fanfare effect for sudden probability change big hit is selected (step S1880e).

  If the small hit effect flag is set (Y in step S1880a), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit display time measurement timer for measuring the execution time of the fanfare effect at the time of the small hit (step S1880a). S1880d), the process proceeds to step S1880e, and the same process data as the process data corresponding to the fanfare effect for the sudden probability change big hit is selected. In other words, in this embodiment, the fanfare effect is executed using the same process data in the case of sudden probability big hit and small hit. Then, the process timer is started (step S1881), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S1882).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the small hit effect flag is set (step S900). If the small hit effect flag is set, the process proceeds to step S902. If the small winning effect flag is not set, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open display command has been received is set (step S100). S901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902). The display time measurement timer value is decremented by 1 (step S902a). Next, when the small hit display time measurement timer is set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the small hit display time measurement timer has timed out (step S902b). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the determination in step S902b only when the small hit effect flag is set. If the small hit effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S903. To do. Therefore, in cases other than small hits, Yes is not determined in the process of step S902b. If timed out, the process proceeds to step S902c, and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S902c).

  When the small hit display time measurement timer is not set, or when the small hit display time timer has not timed out, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect device (variable display device 9, Control of the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred. In this case, the fanfare effect is executed for a predetermined period according to the contents of the process data n for the same sudden probability variation big hit in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit.

  It should be noted that the production control microcomputer 100 has received the command A002 (H) or A003 (H) to A005 (H) even when the fanfare command having the same probability variation jackpot designation is received as the fanfare command. The fanfare effect is executed in a different manner depending on the situation. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays different characters or different characters on the variable display device 9, thereby executing different presentations.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an effect during the round (round according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open display command. An effect for executing display is selected (step S907). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S911).

  In this embodiment, a case has been described in which both a big hit (including suddenly probable big hit) fanfare effects and a small hit fanfare effect are executed in the big hit display processing. The display process may be provided separately from the jackpot display process. In this case, for example, if the small hit effect flag is set in the decorative symbol variation stopping process, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the small hit display time measurement timer and suddenly increases the fanfare for sudden change in probability. Process data corresponding to the effect is selected, and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display process. Then, the same processing as steps S902 to S906 is executed in the small hit display processing.

  61 to 64 are flowcharts showing the mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S1901). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S1901), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the flag for opening the big prize opening indicating that the display command for opening the big prize opening has been received is set. Is confirmed (step S1902).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S1902), the effect control microcomputer 100 is executing the probability change promotion effect indicating that the probability change promotion effect is being executed during the round of the big hit game. It is confirmed whether or not a flag is set (step S1903a). The probability variation promotion effect executing flag is set when processing for starting execution of the promotion effect during round is executed in post-round processing to be described later. When the probability variation promotion execution execution flag is not set (N in Step S1903a), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag during round is set (Step S1903b). If the re-lottery execution flag during the round is not set (N in Step S1903b), the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S1904), and the effect device (variable) Control of the display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1905). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1906), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1908).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S1902 (Y in step S1902), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command after opening the big prize opening. The effect of performing the interval display is selected (step S1909). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S1910), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S1911). Then, the process timer is started (step S1912), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S1913).

  When the ending flag is set in step S1901 (Y in step S1901), it is when an ending command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received ending command is an ending command (commands A301 (H), A303 (H) to A305 (H)) for designating a probable big hit (step S305). S1914a). If it is an ending command that designates a probable big hit, it is checked whether or not a display result non-reception flag is set (step S1914b). If it has been set, it is confirmed whether or not a promotion notification flag indicating that notification has been made that the promotion has already been made is set (step S1914c). As will be described later, the promotion notification flag is set based on the notification that the promotion has been promoted to the probability change promotion effect or the re-lottery effect (see steps S1931 and S1965). If the promotion notification completion flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a big lottery re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit (step S1914d). Further, based on the value of the jackpot symbol determining random number, the stop symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot is determined (step S1914e). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a probability variation symbol as a jackpot symbol based on the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the determined decorative symbol stop symbol in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM, and proceeds to step S1916.

  If it is not an ending command that specifies the probability variation jackpot, or if the display result non-reception flag is not set, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not execution of the probability variation promotion effect is designated in the ending command (that is, Whether or not the ending command has a certain change promotion effect), and if execution of the certain change promotion effect (promotion effect after jackpot) is not designated (N in step S1914f), the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S1916. Migrate to

  If execution of the promotion effect after the big hit is specified in step S1914f, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the promotion notification flag is set (step S1914g). If not set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects an ending effect for performing a probable change promotion effect (promotion effect after jackpot) after the jackpot game ends (step S1915).

  When the execution of the jackpot promotion effect is specified in the ending command by executing the processing of steps S1914f to S1915 (Y of step S1914f), except when notifying that the promotion has already been promoted to probable, The ending effect for promotion after the big hit is selected. In addition, when it is already notified that the re-lottery effect or the promotion effect during the round has been promoted in a promiscuous manner (Y in step S1914g), the ending effect for performing the promotion effect after the big hit is not performed.

  On the other hand, in step S1916, the microcomputer 100 for effect control selects a normal ending effect.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the contents of the symbol / effect designation command and the contents of the ending command are the same with respect to execution / non-execution of the probability variation promotion effect after the end of the jackpot game. (Step S1917).

  Normally, the contents of the symbol / effect designating command and the contents of the ending command should match. However, it may happen that the content of the symbol / effect designating command does not match the content of the ending command. In this case, garbled data or the like has occurred in the process from the transmission from the game control microcomputer 560 to the reception by the effect control microcomputer 100 for either the symbol / effect designation command or the ending command. It can be considered that the command has changed to a command having a different content from the original command.

  At this time, if the ending effect is executed based on the wrong ending command, the probable promotion effect is not performed or the probable promotion effect is executed even though the probable promotion effect should be executed in the ending effect. Although it shouldn't be, a certain promotion promotion effect is executed. In this embodiment, the execution time of the ending effect when the probability change promotion effect is not executed is set to be shorter than the execution time of the ending effect when the probability change promotion effect is executed. Therefore, when an ending effect with a long execution time is being executed, a symbol / effect designation command or a variation pattern command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, or conversely, the ending effect with a short execution time is ended. After that, since the symbol / effect designation command is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, the ending effect end screen is displayed for a while.

  Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when it is determined that the contents of the symbol / effect designation command do not match the contents of the ending command (N in step S1917), the effect control microcomputer 100 The ending effect selected in step S1915 or step S1915 is changed to a special ending effect prepared in advance (step S1918). This special ending effect is an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity and can be finished at any timing. Further, it is preferable not to indicate whether the big hit is a probable big hit or a normal big hit. Thereby, the consistency of control between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 can be ensured without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending flag (step S1919), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S1920). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the production period measurement timer and starts the process timer (step S1921). When executing the promotion effect after the big hit, the microcomputer 100 for effect control starts a probability change promotion effect measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the probability change promotion effect in step S1921. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807) (step S1922). When executing the ending effect corresponding to the promotion effect after the big hit, in step S1921, a longer effect period is set than when executing the normal ending effect, and the effect period measurement timer is started. For example, in step S1921, 5 seconds is set as the effect period when the normal ending effect is executed, and 10 seconds is set as the effect period when the ending effect corresponding to the promotion effect after the big hit is executed. In addition, an effect period shorter than the effect period set in the effect period measurement timer is set in the probability variation promotion effect measurement timer.

  When the flag for the execution of the probable change promotion effect is set in step S1903 (Y in step S1903), the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer (step S1923) and subtracts 1 from the process timer. (Step S1924). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S1925). For example, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the meter on the variable display device 9 and produces an effect of increasing the meter level at a predetermined speed. In addition, for example, a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the variable display device 9, and an effect is displayed that prompts the user to operate the operation button 120 at a timing when the level of the meter increases to the maximum as a character line.

  In step S1925, the production control microcomputer 100 performs display for notifying the operation difficulty level set in the production mode determination process. For example, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 determines how much the operation button 120 should be operated between the maximum point of the meter displayed on the variable display device 9 and the previous point. To display. The production control microcomputer 100 may notify the operation difficulty level by, for example, displaying a value indicating the operation difficulty level on the screen of the variable display device 9. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may display, for example, a meter for indicating the operation difficulty level on the screen of the variable display device 9, and notify the operation difficulty level by changing the level of the meter.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an ON signal from the operation button 120 is detected (step S1926). If an ON signal from the operation button 120 is not detected (that is, if the operation button 120 is not operated by the player), the process proceeds to step S1937. When the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected (that is, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player), the effect control microcomputer 100 indicates the number of operations indicating the number of times the player has operated the operation button 120. The counter is incremented by 1 (step S1927), and it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit effect flag is set (step S1928).

  When the probability change big hit effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 satisfies a predetermined promotion condition for notifying the promotion to probability change (for example, according to the operation difficulty set in step S548). It is determined whether or not the operation button 120 has been operated by the player at the timing (step S1929). In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the effect control microcomputer 100 detects the ON signal of the operation button 120 at the timing when the level of the meter displayed on the variable display device 9 is increased to the maximum, the player performs the operation. It is determined that the button 120 has been successfully operated, and it is determined that a predetermined promotion condition has been established. Further, when the production control microcomputer 100 detects an ON signal of the operation button 120 at a timing other than when the meter level increases to the maximum, the player determines that the operation of the operation button 120 has failed, It is determined that the promotion condition is not satisfied. For example, when the production control microcomputer 100 starts the execution of the probable change promotion effect using the variable display device 9, it starts a promotion condition determination timer for determining whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. In this case, when the effect control microcomputer 100 detects the ON signal of the operation button 120, it checks whether or not the value of the promotion condition determination timer is included in a predetermined range. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the predetermined promotion condition is satisfied if it is included in the predetermined range, and if the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied if it is not included in the predetermined range. judge. The predetermined range is specifically set as the operation difficulty level in the effect mode determination process (see step S548). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the predetermined range to be narrow when setting the operation difficulty level high in the effect mode determination process, and sets the predetermined range when setting the operation difficulty level low. Set to widen the range.

  In step S1929, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is established according to the operation difficulty level set in the production mode determination process. For example, when the set operation difficulty level is high, the production control microcomputer 100 detects the ON signal of the operation button 120 at the timing when the level of the meter displayed on the variable display device 9 is accurately increased to the maximum, and then the predetermined control difficulty level is determined. It is determined that the promotion condition is satisfied. When the set operation difficulty level is low, the production control microcomputer 100 detects the ON signal of the operation button 120 when the meter displays a level between the maximum point and a point before the predetermined margin. Then, it is determined that a predetermined promotion condition has been established. That is, the timing range at which it is determined that the player has succeeded in the operation is widened, and the operation by the operation button 120 becomes easy. The production control microcomputer 100 may change the speed at which the meter level increases according to the operation difficulty level. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 increases the speed at which the meter level increases when the set operation difficulty level is high, and decreases the speed at which the meter level increases when the set operation difficulty level is low. Also good.

  In addition, the production mode of the probable promotion effect is not limited to that shown above. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the left middle right decorative pattern using the variable display device 9 in the probability variation promotion effect, and detects the ON signal from the operation button 120, thereby detecting the left middle An effect of stopping and displaying the decorative pattern on the right may be performed. For example, based on the fact that the player has operated the operation button 120 three times, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops and displays a decorative pattern corresponding to the operation in the order of right and left. In this case, when it is determined in advance that it is a probable big hit, if the player operates the operation button 120 at the timing when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern, the effect control microcomputer 100 will The final stop is made when the right decorative symbols are aligned with the same probability variation. That is, a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied, and the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same probability variation symbols are aligned, and it is notified that the symbol has been promoted to probability variation. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may change the speed at which the decorative design fluctuates according to the operation difficulty level. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may increase the speed at which the decorative symbol fluctuates when the set operation difficulty level is high, and may decrease the speed at which the decorative symbol fluctuates when the set operation difficulty level is low. . In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the number of pull-in in step S548 according to the operation difficulty level, and detects the maximum number of symbols from the detection of the ON signal of the operation button 120 to the stop of the symbol variation. The number of pull-in (how many symbols are changed at the maximum after detecting the ON signal of the operation button 120) may be changed. For example, when the set operation difficulty level is high, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the number of drawing of the symbol to 0 (the variation of the symbol is finally stopped when the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected). When the operation difficulty level is low, the number of symbols drawn may be 4 at the maximum (after the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected, the symbol is changed by a maximum of 4 symbols and finally stopped). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is established based on the timing when the operation button 120 is operated and the maximum number of pull-ins set as the operation difficulty level. You may make it stop a symbol according to. That is, when stopping “7” at the position “6” of the middle reel shown in FIG. 45 (5), if the number of pull-in is 0, “7” must be pressed at the position “6”. When the number is 4, if the operation button 120 is operated when the symbol of “7” is above the position of “6” within the range of 4 symbols, “7” stops at the position of “6”. It may be. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine includes one operation button 120 has been described. However, the gaming machine may include three operation buttons corresponding to the decorative symbols.

  Further, for example, when the gaming machine is provided with three left, middle, and right rotating drums (rotating reels) that are driven to rotate by a drum motor separately from the liquid crystal display device (for example, the variable display device 9), In the probability variation promotion effect, the microcomputer 100 may perform the probability variation promotion effect by rotating the left, middle, and right rotating drums. And based on having detected the ON signal from the operation button 120, you may perform the effect which stops the rotation drum of the left middle right. For example, based on the fact that the player has operated the operation button 120 three times, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the rotation of the rotating drum corresponding to the operation in the order of right and left. In this case, when it is determined in advance that it is a probable big hit, if the player operates the operation button 120 at the timing when the stop symbols of the left, middle and right rotating drums are aligned with the same symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 will The rotation is stopped with the left, middle and right rotating drums aligned with the same probability variation. That is, a predetermined promotion condition is established, and the left, middle and right rotating drums are stopped in a state where they have the same probability variation pattern, and it is notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability variation. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may change the speed at which the rotating drum rotates according to the operation difficulty level. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may increase the rotating speed of the rotating drum when the set operation difficulty level is high, and decrease the rotating speed of the rotating drum when the set operation difficulty level is low. . Further, the production control microcomputer 100 detects the maximum number of symbols drawn from the detection of the ON signal of the operation button 120 until the rotation of the rotating drum is stopped (the ON signal of the operation button 120 is determined according to the operation difficulty level). It is also possible to change how many symbols are changed at the maximum after the detection and the final stop). For example, when the set operation difficulty level is high, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the number of drawing of the symbol to 0 (the variation of the symbol is finally stopped when the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected). When the operation difficulty level is low, the number of symbols drawn may be 4 at the maximum (after the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected, the symbol is changed by a maximum of 4 symbols and finally stopped). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is established based on the timing when the operation button 120 is operated and the maximum number of pull-ins set as the operation difficulty level. Accordingly, the rotating drum may be stopped. That is, when stopping “7” at the position “6” of the middle reel shown in FIG. 45 (5), if the number of pull-in is 0, “7” must be pressed at the position “6”. When the number is 4, if the operation button 120 is operated when the symbol of “7” is above the position of “6” within the range of 4 symbols, “7” stops at the position of “6”. It may be. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine includes one operation button 120 has been described, but the gaming machine may include three operation buttons corresponding to the rotating drum.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may select and execute any one of the above-described production modes of the probable change promotion production. In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the variable display device 9 to display the meter on the variable display device 9 based on the value of the effect mode determination random number. It is also possible to select either an effect performed by varying the effect or an effect performed by rotating the left, middle, and right rotating drums, and execute the probable promotion effect according to the selected effect mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is established based on an ON signal from the operation button 120 that outputs one type of ON signal when pressed. The machine may include, for example, a button (a loose cross key) that outputs four types of on signals depending on which part of the top, bottom, left, and right is pressed. In this case, for example, when it is detected that the upper, lower, left and right portions of the cross key are pressed in a predetermined order within a predetermined time (for example, within 3 seconds), the game control microcomputer 560 satisfies a predetermined promotion condition. May be determined.

  When it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition has been established, the production control microcomputer 100 displays on the variable display device 9 that it has been promoted to certain change (step S1930) and has already notified that it has been promoted to certain change. Is set (step S1931). In this embodiment, notifying that the probability has been promoted to the probability variation promotion effect is equivalent to executing a notification effect for notifying that the probability variation big hit has been determined in advance. In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays “probability big hit” on the variable display device 9 to notify that it has been promoted to probability change. If it is determined in step S1929 that the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied, or if it is determined in step S1928 that the probability variation big hit effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1941.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the probability variation promotion in-progress execution flag (step S1932) and confirms whether or not the flag for opening the big prize opening is set (step S1933). If the flag for opening the big prize opening is set, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1909. In other words, in this case, since the round has already ended (for example, when the number of winnings in the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number and the round has ended in a short period of time), the production control microcomputer 100 controls to perform an interval effect after the round.

  If the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects an in-round production to be executed after notifying that it has been promoted to certain change (step S1934). In this embodiment, separately from the production during the normal round, after informing that it was promoted to probability change, after notifying that it was not promoted to probability change, and after notifying the expected degree of promotion to probability change Process data for executing the production during the round is prepared in advance. Then, by performing an effect that displays a character or the like different from the effect during the normal round, the promotion to non-promotion or non-promotion is made known.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect during the round (step S1935) and starts a process timer (step S1936).

  If the ON signal from the operation button 120 is not detected in step S1926, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S1937). If the production period measurement timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1938). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched. It performs (step S1939). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1940).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect number counter (step S1941), and determines whether the value of the effect number counter after subtraction is 0 or not. Confirmation is made (step S1942). Even if the probability variation big hit effect flag is not set in step S1928 and the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied in step S1929, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1941 and the number of effects Subtract 1 from the counter value.

  The fact that the value of the production counter is 0 in step S1942 means that the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied even though the certain variation promotion production of all production times determined in the production mode determination process is executed (player) Is a case where the operation for notifying that the transition to the probability change has never succeeded). When the value of the production counter is 0, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether the value of the operation counter is 0 (step S1943).

  In addition, when the production period is determined by determining the execution time of the probable promotion effect rather than determining the number of productions in the production mode determination process, the production mode decision process is determined in the post-round processing described later. The execution time is set in the production period measurement timer. In this case, for example, when the promotion effect during the round is executed a plurality of times during the big hit game, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out in step S1937. It is determined whether or not the execution time per middle promotion process has elapsed. Further, for example, when the promotion effect during the round is executed only once during the big hit game, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out in step S1937. It is determined whether or not the entire production period of the middle promotion production has elapsed. In this case, if the effect period measurement timer has timed out in step S1937, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that all effect periods of the promotion effect during the round have ended, and executes the processes of steps S1941 and S1942. Instead, the process proceeds to step S1943 to confirm the value of the operation number counter.

  In step S1943, the value of the operation number counter being 0 means that the player has never operated the operation button 120 in the probability change promotion effect (promotion effect during round) executed two or more times. . Further, the fact that the value of the operation number counter is not 0 in step S1943 means that the player has operated the operation button 120 at least once in the probability variation promotion effect.

  If the value of the operation number counter is 0 in step S1943, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1950. If the value of the operation number counter is not 0, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays on the variable display device 9 an advance notice of the expected degree of promotion to probability change (step S1944). In this embodiment, “expected degree of promotion to probability change” refers to the degree of reliability of transition to probability change.

  In addition, when the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied and the value of the operation number counter is 0 in spite of the execution of the probability variation promotion effect of all the performance times, the expected degree of the probability variation promotion is not always notified, It may be determined whether or not to notify the expected degree by lottery, and when it is determined to perform the notification of the expected degree, the expected degree of the probability variation promotion may be notified.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the probability variation promotion in-progress execution flag (step S1945) and confirms whether or not the flag for opening the big prize opening is set (step S1946). If the flag for opening the big prize opening is set, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1909. In other words, in this case, since the round has already ended (for example, when the number of winnings in the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number and the round has ended in a short period of time), the production control microcomputer 100 controls to perform an interval effect after the round.

  When the flag for opening the big prize opening is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects an in-round production to be executed after notifying the expected degree of promotion to probability change (step S1947). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect during the round (step S1948), and starts a process timer (step S1949).

  The fact that the value of the effect counter is not 0 in step S1942 means that the execution of the probable promotion effect for the number of effects determined in the effect mode determination process has not been completed, and there is still a promotion effect during the round to be executed. Is the case. If the value of the effect counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1950, and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays on the variable display device 9 that it has not been promoted to certainty (step S1950). In addition, when the value of the operation number counter is 0 in step S1943, the process proceeds to step S1950, and the production control microcomputer 100 displays on the variable display device 9 that it has not been promoted to certainty (step S1950). S1950). In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display device 9 that the character has not been promoted to probability change by displaying, for example, “I was not promoted to probability change” as a character line. Note that the production control microcomputer 100 displays, for example, “Next, let's succeed in the probable change promotion” on the variable display device 9 as a character line, thereby giving the player the probable change promotion effect. You may make it improve willingness to participate.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the flag indicating that the probability change promotion effect is being executed (step S1951) and confirms whether or not the flag after opening the big prize opening is set (step S1952). If the flag for opening the big prize opening is set, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1909. In other words, in this case, since the round has already ended (for example, when the number of winnings in the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number and the round has ended in a short period of time), the production control microcomputer 100 controls to perform an interval effect after the round.

  If the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects an in-round production to be executed after notifying that it has not been promoted to a certain probability (step S1953). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected effect during the round (step S1954), and starts a process timer (step S1955).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when no ON signal from the operation button 120 is detected (that is, when the player does not operate the operation button 120 at all), the probability variation big hit is set. Even if it is a case where it is determined in advance, an effect of notifying that it has not been promoted to certain change is executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player an impression that the player will not be promoted to probability unless the operation button 120 is operated in the probability variation promotion effect, and to improve the player's willingness to participate in the probability variation promotion effect. Can do.

  In this embodiment, in the promotion effect during the round, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is established based on the operation of the operation button 120, and the promotion to non-promotion or non-promotion is notified. However, regardless of the operation by the operation button 120, for example, a re-lottery effect for re-lotting whether or not to be promoted to probability change may be executed.

  For example, if the promotion execution flag during round is set in the in-round processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the time after the start of the round has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (step S1846). reference). If it has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the time after the start of the round has passed the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect (see step S1853). If the start time of the big hit symbol fixed effect has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects and selects the process data of the re-lottery effect according to the same process as steps S1854 to S1857 in the decorative symbol changing process. A re-lottery effect is executed according to the process data. If the start time of the big hit symbol fixed effect has elapsed, the microcomputer 100 for effect control selects and selects the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect according to the same process as steps S1858 to S1864 in the decorative symbol changing process. In accordance with the processed data, control is performed to display the jackpot symbol.

  When the re-lottery execution flag during round is set in step S1903b, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms the start time of the re-lottery effect in the variation pattern that can be recognized from the EXT data of the variation pattern, and further changes the variation time timer. By checking this value, it is determined whether or not the time after the start of fluctuation has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (step S1956). If the start time of the re-lottery effect has not yet elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1904.

  If the time after the start of the change has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (Y in step S1956), the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the change that can be recognized from the EXT data stored in the change pattern data storage area. It is determined whether the time after the start of fluctuation has passed the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect by checking the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect in the pattern and checking the value of the variation time timer (step S1957).

  If the start time of the big hit symbol determination effect has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect is being executed by checking the value of the variable time timer. (Step 1958). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the re-lottery effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the re-lottery effect is started. If the re-lottery effect is not being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data for the re-lottery effect (step S1959), and sets the process timer set value in the selected process data as the process timer. Then, the process timer is started (step S1960). Then, control of the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed in accordance with the contents of the process data of the re-lottery effect (step S1961). If the re-lottery effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1961 as it is and according to the contents of the re-lottery effect process data, the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps). The control of the speaker 27) is executed.

  When it is determined in step S1957 that the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the variable time timer to execute the jackpot symbol determination effect. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step S1962). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the big hit symbol finalizing effect is started. If the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data of the big hit symbol finalizing effect corresponding to the symbol arrangement reflecting the symbol determined in step S1840 ( Step S1963). If the symbol determined in step S1840 is a probability variation symbol (Y in step S1964), a promotion notification flag indicating that the symbol has been promoted to probability variation is set (step S1965). If it is not a probable variation symbol (N in step S1964), a non-elevation informed flag indicating that it has not been promoted to a probable variation is set (step S1966).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data in the process timer and starts the process timer (step S1967). In addition, as the process data for the big hit symbol determination effect, a plurality of process data having a symbol arrangement that can correspond to all combinations of changed symbols are prepared in advance. Then, the control of the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the content of the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect (step S1968). In this embodiment, when the re-lottery execution flag during round is set in the command control process, either the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol (see step S1641a). When the big hit symbol finalization effect is executed in S1968, either the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If the big hit symbol finalizing effect is being executed in step S1962, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1968 as it is and executes control of the directing device according to the contents of the big hit symbol finalizing effect process data. .

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (step S1971). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1971), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1972), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1973). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1974), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1975). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1976).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S1971), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the probable change promotion execution flag during round is set (step S1977). If the during-round probability change promotion execution flag is set (Y in step S1977), the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1978. If the during-round probability change promotion execution flag is not set in step S1977, the process proceeds to step S1985.

  In step S1978, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the current round is the execution round of the probability-changed promotion production determined in the production mode determination process. In this case, for example, the presentation control microcomputer 100 determines how many rounds the present winning round is based on the content of the special winning opening opening display command (command A1XX (H) shown in FIG. 7) received from the game control microcomputer 560. To determine whether Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the identified current round is the execution round of the probable promotion effect by determining whether or not the specified current round matches the execution round determined in the effect mode determination process. To do. If it is not the execution round of the probable promotion effect, the process proceeds to step S1985.

  In the case of the execution round of the probability change promotion effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the promotion notification flag is set (step S1979). The fact that the promotion notification flag has been set means that it is after the fact that the promotion has been promoted in the round promotion effect that has already been executed has been notified. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1985 without proceeding to the start processing of the probable promotion effect after step S1980. By doing so, there is an unnatural situation that the probability change promotion effect will be executed even though it has been notified that it has been promoted to probability change in the promotion effect during the round already executed. Can be prevented.

  If the promotion notification completed flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the probability change promotion effect (in this case, the promotion effect during the round) (step S1980), and performs the probability change promotion effect. A probability change promotion effect executing flag indicating that it is being executed is set (step S1981). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S1982) and starts the production period measurement timer (step S1983). Then, the process timer is started (step S1984), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1989). If the production period is determined by determining the execution time of the probable promotion effect in the production mode determination process, the execution time determined in the production mode determination process is set in the production period measurement timer in step S1983. May be.

  In this embodiment, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player, the promotion effect during the round is ended by informing the promotion or non-promotion of probability change depending on whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. To do. When the operation button 120 is not operated by the player, the promotion effect during the round may be ended when the effect period measurement timer set in step S1983 times out. By doing so, since the probability change promotion effect is executed according to the preset effect period, when the round ends during the execution of the probability change promotion effect (for example, a predetermined number of winning prizes to the big prize opening (for example, 10) and the round is finished in a short period of time), it is possible to continue the probable promotion effect and prevent the situation from unnaturally ending during the probable promotion effect. it can. When the round is finished in a short period of time, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the probability change promotion effect across a plurality of rounds. In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may update only the display of the number of rounds when the rounds are switched, and may continue the probability change promotion effect. For example, if the flag for opening the special prize opening is set in step S1902, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the probability variation promotion effect executing flag is set. If the probability variation promotion effect executing flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the probability variation promotion effect after step S1923 without shifting to the interval effect after step S1909. Thereafter, when the next round starts and the flag after opening the big prize opening is reset, the production control microcomputer 100 determines in step S1902 that the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set, and in step S1903. If the probable change promotion effect execution flag is set, the probable change promotion effect after step S1923 is executed. Then, in the probable promotion effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms, for example, whether or not the large winning opening opening display command “A1XX” has been received, and if received, the large winning opening open display command The number of rounds to be displayed on the variable display device 9 is updated based on the number of rounds specified in (1).

  For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may start a production period measurement timer by setting a short production period (for example, 5 seconds) in step S1983. That is, it is rare that the number of wins at the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) during such a short time (for example, 5 seconds) and the round is not ended. It is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the round ends and the probable promotion effect ends unnaturally on the way.

  In step S1985, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects an effect during the round (an effect of executing a round display corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command for opening the special prize opening (step S1985). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S1986), and the process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S1987). Then, the process timer is started (step S1988), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1989).

  If the process data different from the process data used for the production during the normal round is prepared in advance, and the promoted notification flag is set in step S1979, the production control microcomputer 100 determines in step S1987. You may select process data different from a normal round production. By doing so, if you are informed that you have already been promoted to probable during the jackpot game round, the probable promotion effect will be executed based on the production data different from the probable promotion effect An effect different from the probable promotion effect may be executed during the same period.

  66 and 67 are flowcharts showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S970) and confirms whether or not the execution of the probable change promotion effect is specified (step S971). ). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the execution of the probability variation promotion effect is designated, for example, by confirming whether or not the probability variation promotion execution flag is set after the big hit. If execution of the probable change promotion effect is not designated, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S973), and whether the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is set. It is confirmed whether or not (step S973a). If the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S974.

  If the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the start time of the re-lottery effect in the variation pattern recognizable from the variation pattern EXT data, and further sets the value of the variation time timer. By checking, it is determined whether or not the time after the start of fluctuation has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (step S973b). If the start time of the re-lottery effect has not yet elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S974.

  If the time after the start of the change has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (Y in step S973b), the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize the change that can be recognized from the EXT data stored in the change pattern data storage area. It is determined whether or not the time after the start of fluctuation has passed the start time of the big hit symbol fixed effect by checking the start time of the big hit symbol fixed effect in the pattern and checking the value of the fluctuation time timer (step S973c).

  If the start time of the big hit symbol determination effect has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect is being executed by checking the value of the variable time timer. (Step 973d). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the re-lottery effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the re-lottery effect is started. If the re-lottery effect is not being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data for the re-lottery effect (step S973e), and sets the process timer set value in the selected process data as the process timer. Then, the process timer is started (step S973f). Then, the control of the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the contents of the process data of the re-lottery effect (step S973g). If the re-lottery effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S973g as it is, and the effect device (first variable display device 9a, various lamps) according to the contents of the re-lottery effect process data. The control of the speaker 27) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S973c that the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the variation time timer to execute the jackpot symbol determination effect. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step S973h). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the big hit symbol finalizing effect is started. If the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data of the big hit symbol finalizing effect corresponding to the symbol arrangement reflecting the symbol determined in step S1840 ( Step S973i).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data in the process timer and starts the process timer (step S973j). In addition, as the process data for the big hit symbol determination effect, a plurality of process data having a symbol arrangement that can correspond to all combinations of changed symbols are prepared in advance. Then, control of the effect device (variable display device, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the contents of the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect (step S973k). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the probability variation symbol as a big hit symbol based on the decorative symbol determined in step S1914e.

  If the big hit symbol fixed effect is being executed in step S973h, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S973k as it is, and executes control of the directing device according to the contents of the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect. .

  In step S974, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of controlling the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S974). For example, when the end of the jackpot is displayed, or when the contents of the symbol / effect designating command and the contents of the ending command do not match, the special ending effect described above is executed. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a predetermined character on the display screen of the variable display device 9 and displays a sentence such as “See you!” As the character's speech, thereby informing the end of the big hit. To do.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  When the production period measurement timer times out (Y in step S972), the production control microcomputer 100 resets predetermined flags such as the normal big hit production flag and the probability variation big hit production flag (step S978), and the production control process flag Is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S979).

  If execution of the probability change promotion effect is designated in step S971, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the probability change promotion effect measurement timer and subtracts 1 from the process timer (step S980). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S981). For example, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the meter on the variable display device 9 and produces an effect of increasing the meter level at a predetermined speed. In addition, for example, a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the variable display device 9, and an effect is displayed that prompts the user to operate the operation button 120 at a timing when the level of the meter increases to the maximum as a character line.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not an ON signal from the operation button 120 is detected (step S982). If the on signal from the operation button 120 is not detected (that is, the operation button 120 is not operated by the player), the process proceeds to step S989. When the ON signal of the operation button 120 is detected (that is, when the operation button 120 is operated by the player), the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the probability variation big hit effect flag is set. (Step S983).

  When the probability variation big hit effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a predetermined promotion condition for notifying the promotion to probability change is satisfied (step S984). In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the effect control microcomputer 100 detects the ON signal of the operation button 120 at the timing when the level of the meter displayed on the variable display device 9 is increased to the maximum, the player performs the operation. It is determined that the button 120 has been successfully operated, and it is determined that a predetermined promotion condition has been established. Further, when the production control microcomputer 100 detects an ON signal of the operation button 120 at a timing other than when the meter level increases to the maximum, the player determines that the operation of the operation button 120 has failed, It is determined that the promotion condition is not satisfied.

  In addition, the effect aspect of the promotion effect after the big hit is not limited to the above-described one as in the case of the promotion effect during the round. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the left middle right decorative pattern using the variable display device 9 in the probability variation promotion effect, and detects the ON signal from the operation button 120, thereby detecting the left middle An effect of stopping and displaying the decorative pattern on the right may be performed. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the decorative symbols in the order of right and left based on the player operating the operation button 120 three times. In this case, if the player operates the operation button 120 at the timing when the left, middle and right decorative symbols are aligned in the same pattern, the effect control microcomputer 100 will end up with the left, middle and right decorative symbols aligned in the same probability variation pattern. Stop. That is, a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied, and the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same probability variation symbols are aligned, and it is notified that the symbol has been promoted to probability variation.

  Further, for example, when the gaming machine includes three left middle right rotating drums (rotary reels) that are driven to rotate by a drum motor, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the left middle right rotating drum. Depending on the situation, the probable promotion promotion may be performed. And based on having detected the ON signal from the operation button 120, you may perform the effect which stops the rotation drum of the left middle right. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the rotation of the rotating drum in the order of right and left based on the player operating the operation button 120 three times. In this case, when the player operates the operation button 120 at the timing when the stop symbols of the left, middle and right rotating drums are aligned in the same pattern, the effect control microcomputer 100 aligns the left, middle and right rotating drums in the same probability variation pattern. Stop rotation in the state. That is, a predetermined promotion condition is established, and the left, middle and right rotating drums are stopped in a state where they have the same probability variation pattern, and it is notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability variation.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may select and execute any one of the above-described production modes of the probable change promotion production. In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the variable display device 9 to display the meter on the variable display device 9 based on the value of the effect mode determination random number. It is also possible to select either an effect performed by varying the effect or an effect performed by rotating the left, middle, and right rotating drums, and execute the probable promotion effect according to the selected effect mode.

  If it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition is established, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the fact that the promotion has been promoted to the variable display device 9 (step S985). In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays “probability big hit” on the variable display device 9 to notify that it has been promoted to probability change.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change promotion execution flag after the big hit (step S986), and process data corresponding to the effect to be executed in the remaining time of the ending effect after notifying that it has been promoted to probability change. Select (step S987). In this embodiment, in addition to the normal ending effect, in order to execute an effect to be executed during the remaining time of the ending effect after notifying that it has been promoted to probability change or notifying that it has not been promoted to probability change Process data is prepared in advance. Then, by performing an effect that displays a character or the like different from the normal ending effect, the promotion to non-promotion or non-promotion is made known. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a process timer (step S988).

  When the ON signal from the operation button 120 is not detected in step S982, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the probability variation promotion effect measurement timer has timed out (step S989). If the certain change promotion effect measurement timer has not timed out, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S990). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched. (Step S991). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S992).

  If the probability variation promotion effect measurement timer has timed out, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays that the variable display device 9 has not been promoted to probability variation (step S993). Further, when the probability variation big hit effect flag is not set in step S983 or when a predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied in step S984, the process proceeds to step S993, and the effect control microcomputer 100 performs variable display. The fact that the device 9 has not been promoted to probability is displayed on the device 9 (step S993). In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display device 9 that the character has not been promoted to probability change by displaying, for example, “I was not promoted to probability change” as a character line.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change promotion execution flag after the big hit (step S994), and processes according to the effect to be executed during the remaining time of the ending effect after notifying that it has not been promoted to probability change. Data is selected (step S995). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a process timer (step S996).

  In this embodiment, in the promotion effect after the big hit, as in the promotion effect during the round, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is established based on the detection of the ON signal from the operation button 120, We explained the case of informing that the promotion has been promoted to probability when the promotion condition is satisfied, but informing that the promotion has been unconditionally promoted unconditionally in the promotion effect after the jackpot without determining whether the predetermined promotion condition has been established You may make it do. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processes of steps S982, S983, and S984, and performs the process of step S985 if the probability variation big hit production flag is set after the predetermined production period has elapsed. If it is executed to notify that it has been promoted to probability variation, and if the probability variation big hit effect flag is not set, the processing of step S993 may be performed to notify that it has not been promoted to probability variation.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the big hit designating variation pattern command is received, but the display result command is not received, it is replayed in the post jackpot promotion effect based on the receipt of the probabilistic big hit designating ending command. Although the case where the lottery effect is performed has been described, it may be notified that the ending effect is unconditionally promoted without performing the re-lottery.

  In this embodiment, when the operation button 120 is operated once in the promotion effect after the big hit, it is determined whether or not the probability variable big hit effect flag is set and whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. The determination is made so as to notify the promotion to the probability change or the non-promotion, but the operation button 120 may be operated any number of times until the effect period of the promotion effect after the big hit ends. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S989 if, for example, the probability variation big hit production flag is not set in step S983 or if the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied in step S984. Then, confirm whether or not the probable promotion effect measurement timer has timed out. If the probability change promotion effect measurement timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step S990, and the process of the probability change promotion effect after step S980 is repeatedly executed until the effect period of the promotion effect after jackpot ends. If the probability variation promotion effect measurement timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S993 to notify that the probability variation promotion timer has not been promoted to probability variation. Even if it is notified that the promotion control microcomputer 100 has not been promoted to a certain probability once, the determination process for the establishment of a predetermined promotion condition is repeatedly executed until the probability variation promotion effect measurement timer times out. The notification of promotion to probability change or non-promotion may be executed.

  In this embodiment, in the promotion effect after jackpot, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is established based on the operation of the operation button 120, and a case where a promotion to a probability change or a non-promotion is notified is described. However, regardless of the operation by the operation button 120, for example, a re-lottery effect for re-lotting whether or not to be promoted to probability change may be executed.

  For example, if the after-hit promotion execution flag is set in the big-hit end production process, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the time after the start of the ending has passed the start time of the re-lottery production (step) (See S1846). If it has elapsed, it is determined whether the time after the start of the ending has passed the start time of the big hit symbol determination effect (see step S1853). If the start time of the big hit symbol fixed effect has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects and selects the process data of the re-lottery effect according to the same process as steps S1854 to S1857 in the decorative symbol changing process. A re-lottery effect is executed according to the process data. If the start time of the big hit symbol fixed effect has elapsed, the microcomputer 100 for effect control selects and selects the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect according to the same process as steps S1858 to S1864 in the decorative symbol changing process. In accordance with the processed data, control is performed to display the jackpot symbol.

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 and the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect by the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. In FIG. 68, when the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is normally received by the effect control microcomputer 100 when it is determined that the effect is a big hit (in this example, a promising big hit). Indicates.

  As shown in FIG. 68, every time a special winning symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 8 with the start winning, the special symbol normal processing (step S300) results in the determination of the big hit determination, whether the normal big hit or the probable big hit. The symbol / effect designation command (display result command) corresponding to the determination result (whether or not the probability variation big hit is determined) and the determination result of whether or not the probability variation promotion effect is executed is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Specifically, when the determination result of the big hit determination is “missing”, a missing designation command is transmitted. When the determination result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, the normal big hit designation command is transmitted when the determination result of the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit is “normal big hit”. When the decision result of whether or not the normal big hit or the probable big hit is “probable big hit”, the probable big hit designation command is sent when the decision result of whether or not the probable promotion effect is executed is “no execution of the probable promotion effect” Is done. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not to execute the probable promotion effect is “Execution of probable promotion effect”, the probable jackpot designation command with the probable change promotion effect during the round, the probable jackpot designation command with the probable change promotion effect during the round, and the probable promotion Probability big hit designation command with production is transmitted. Further, when it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit is suddenly, a sudden probability change big hit designation command is transmitted. When it is determined that a small hit is made, a small hit designation command is transmitted.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to be out of play, suddenly determined to be a promising big hit, or determined to be a small hit, based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, A stop symbol of a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is selected. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to be a big hit, based on the symbol / effect designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops as a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. Determine the probability variation or non-probability variation.

  Then, in the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbol is determined using a predetermined variation pattern determination table, and the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is a microcomputer for effect control. 100.

  In response to the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of decorative symbols (variable display) in the variable display device 9. As described above, the variation of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 measures the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol variation processing (step S302) and controls the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 (steps S301 to S301). S303). In this case, if execution of the probable change promotion effect is specified in the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect during the variation display of the decorative symbol. When the decorative symbol variation time elapses, in the special symbol variation stop process (step S303), the special symbol change in the special symbol display 8 is stopped and a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is done. When the determination result in the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a fanfare command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In response to the reception of the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a 15-round big hit using effect devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c. A fanfare effect for informing the player of this fact is executed for a predetermined period. For example, the variable display device 9 displays a decorative jackpot symbol (such as “222” or “777”), and also displays a character (“big jackpot!”) Indicating that the jackpot has been won. Further, a sound effect when the big hit is made from the speaker 27 is emitted, or the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are turned on in a lighting pattern when the big hit.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 560 starts measuring the jackpot display time (the time from the stop display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round of jackpot) in the big prize opening opening pre-processing (step S304). To do. When the big hit display time has elapsed, when a big hit for 15 rounds is started, a display command for opening the big prize opening is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for effect control. The display state of the variable display device 9 during each round is specified by the display command during opening of the special winning opening. Further, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. As a result, the first round in the big hit game starts.

  The presentation control microcomputer 100 uses the presentation device such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28 a to 28 c in response to reception of the display command for opening the big prize opening from the gaming control microcomputer 560. A round effect (round display) for notifying the player that the current round is in progress is executed. For example, the decorative display jackpot symbol (“222”, “777”, etc.) is displayed on the variable display device 9, and characters indicating the current round (“first round”), other characters, and the like are displayed. Further, a sound effect during the round is emitted from the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are lit in the lighting pattern during the round.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 starts measurement of the round time for 15 rounds in the special winning opening opening process (step S305). Further, every time the count switch 23 is detected to be turned on, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1, thereby counting the number of winning balls to the big winning opening. Also, a count number designation command for designating the count number is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  When the round time has elapsed or when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the large winning opening. Thus, the first round during the big hit game is completed. At this time, since the number of rounds is not 15, a display command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The production control microcomputer 100 uses the production devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28 a to 28 c in response to reception of the display command after the special winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560. An interval effect (interval display) for informing the player that the interval is within a predetermined period is executed.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 starts measuring the interval time (the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round) in the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S304). When the interval time elapses, a special winning opening open display command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Further, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening.

  The pre-opening pre-opening process and the pre-opening process are repeatedly executed until the 15th round is completed.

  When the microcomputer 100 for effect control receives a normal jackpot specifying command with a probable change during round or a promiscuous jackpot specifying command with a probable change during round as a symbol / effect specifying command, an effect mode determining process (step S705). Probability promotion effect (promotion effect during the round) is executed in the execution round determined in. FIG. 68 shows an example in which the number of effects of the probable change promotion effect is determined as 3 in the effect mode determination process, and the execution rounds are determined as rounds 11, 13, and 15. In the probability variation promotion effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect of notifying that the promotion has been promoted to probability variation, on condition that the probability variation big hit effect flag is set and a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. In other words, it is determined in advance that it will be a probable big hit, and it is notified that the player has been promoted to probable on the condition that a predetermined operation has been performed by the player.

  In FIG. 68, when it is informed that the probability change promotion effect executed in round 11 has already been promoted to probability change, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not perform the probability change promotion effect in round 13 and round 15. Control. In addition, in the case where it is informed that the probability change promotion effect executed in the round 13 has already been promoted to the probability change, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control so that the probability change promotion effect is not performed in the round 15.

  When the value of the round counter reaches 15 in the big prize opening process, an ending command is produced depending on whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set and whether each probability variation promotion flag is set. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100.

  In response to the reception of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effect display devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c to end the big hit. An ending effect (a jackpot end display) to notify the person is executed for a predetermined period. For example, the variable display device 9 displays a character indicating the end of the big hit (“See you again!”), A character indicating that the state has shifted to the probability change state (“probability!”), Or the like, or the speaker 27 from the ending effect. For example, or the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are lit in a lighting pattern for an ending effect.

  Thereafter, in the game control microcomputer 560, in the jackpot end process (step S306), the measurement of the jackpot end time (the execution time of the ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot) is started. In the example shown in FIG. 68, the probability variation promotion effect (promotion effect after jackpot) is executed in the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command instructed to execute the probability change promotion effect in the ending after the big hit. Show the case. When the big hit end time elapses, a predetermined flag (big hit flag, probability variation big hit flag, probability variation promotion flag) is set / reset. Then, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol variation is started.

  Next, the transmission timing of the effect control command when the display result command cannot be received among the effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 when the jackpot is determined will be described. FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the execution timing of the probability change promotion effect when the display result command cannot be received.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, the effect control microcomputer 100 can receive the symbol / effect designation command (display result command) although it has received the variation pattern command of the probability variation big hit / normal big hit designation from the game control microcomputer 560. Suppose that there was no. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that it is at least a big hit by the variation pattern command, so the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected to determine the stop symbol (non-probable variation symbol) of the decorative symbol ( Steps S1863 and S1868). Then, the stop symbol (non-probable variation symbol) of the normal big hit decoration symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 (see step S1872).

  Next, the transmission timing and the production timing of the production control command when it is suddenly determined to be a probable big hit will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing and the production timing of the production control command when it is suddenly determined that the probability change big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the received variation pattern command designated for sudden probability variation big hit, stops the decorative symbols for sudden probability variation big hit (for example, “123” and “357”). The combination of symbols is determined (see step S1819). Then, when the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol elapses, the special symbol and the decorative symbol variable display are stopped, and the variable display device 9 displays the decorative symbol stop symbol (for example, “123” or “357”). Combination) is derived and displayed (see step S1872). As shown in FIG. 70, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern command even if the display result command cannot be received. Then, as shown in FIG. 70, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and then executes the fanfare effect corresponding to the sudden probability big hit for a predetermined period.

  Next, the transmission timing and the production timing of the production control command when it is determined as the small hit will be described. FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the effect timing when it is determined that the game is a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the received small hit designating variation pattern command, uses the stop pattern of the suddenly promising big hit decorative symbol as the stop symbol of the small hit decorative symbol. A similar stop symbol (for example, a combination of symbols “123” and “357”) is determined (see step S1819). Then, when the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol elapses, the special symbol and the decorative symbol variable display are stopped, and the variable display device 9 displays the decorative symbol stop symbol (for example, “123” or “357”). Combination) is derived and displayed (see step S1872). As shown in FIG. 71, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern command even if the display result command cannot be received. Then, as shown in FIG. 71, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative design, and then executes the fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect corresponding to the sudden probability big hit for a predetermined period.

  Next, an effect aspect of the promising change promotion effect of the jackpot symbol executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. 72 to 74 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the probable change promotion effect of the jackpot symbol executed in the variable display device. 72 to 74, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3). 72 to 74 are executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100. 72 to 74, an example will be described in which the probability variation promotion effect is executed by determining the number of effects as 3 times during the round of the big hit game. The same applies to the case where the probability variation promotion effect is executed by determining the number of performances to be 4 or 2 during the big hit game round, and the case where the probability change promotion effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit game ends.

  As a precondition, it is assumed that the game control microcomputer 560 determines that it is a big hit in the big hit determination and determines that it is a probable big hit. Furthermore, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the probable promotion effect during the big hit game round. In response to this, a probability variation jackpot designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Further, in response to the fact that the game control microcomputer 560 has determined the variation pattern, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern effect control command (variation pattern command) to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The microcomputer 100 for effect control receives the command for determining the probability change jackpot with the probability change promotion during round, and sets the flag for the probability change jackpot effect and also sets the flag for the probability change promotion execution during the round. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command to save the variation pattern and sets the variation pattern reception flag. Further, since execution of the probability variation promotion effect during the round is designated, the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol (big hit symbol). Moreover, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the production mode determination process (step S705), determines the number of productions of the promotion effect during the round (step S546), and determines the operation difficulty level in each execution round (step S546). S548). In the example shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the number of effects is determined to be 3, and the effect execution rounds are determined to be rounds 11, 13, and 15, respectively. In addition, the operation difficulty level in round 11 is determined to be 5, the operation difficulty level in round 13 is determined to be 3, and the operation difficulty level in round 15 is determined to be 1.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (1), when the variation time indicated by the variation pattern elapses after the variation (decorative display) of the decorative symbol is started in the variable display device 9, the variation is temporarily stopped and determined in step S1649. In addition, the jackpot symbol (stop symbol) of the non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed. In the example shown in (1), the non-probable variation pattern “222” is derived and displayed. After that, the game shifts to the big hit game state, and the big hit games from round 1 to round 15 are executed. When it is round 11 of the big hit game, the first probability change promotion effect is started (steps S1977 to S1984).

  When the first chance change promotion effect is started, a meter is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as shown in (2). In addition, a sentence “Press the button with MAX if you want to be promoted to certain change!” Is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as a character line (step S1925). The measurement of the production period is started from this point (step S1983).

  As shown in (3), display is performed such that the meter level gradually increases (steps S1925, S1938 to S1940). As shown in (4), if the operation button 120 is never operated by the player while the meter level increases to the maximum, as shown in (5), the meter level returns to the minimum point, The display is gradually repeated so that the level increases gradually (steps S1925, S1938 to S1940).

  As shown in (6), when the player operates the operation button 120, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied (step S1929). In the example shown in (6), since the operation button 120 is operated before the meter level reaches the maximum, it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied (N in step S1929). Then, as shown in (7), on the screen of the variable display device 9, a sentence “Sorry! Probability promotion failure, then do your best” is displayed as a character line (step S1950). Such a display corresponds to a display indicating that the display has not been promoted to certainty. If the operation button 120 has never been operated by the player, when a predetermined production period has elapsed (Y in step S1937), a message indicating that the player has not been promoted to a certain probability is displayed as shown in (7). (Step S1950), the probable promotion effect is terminated.

  Next, when it becomes round 13 of the jackpot game, the second probability change promotion effect is started (steps S1977 to S1984). If it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition has been established in the first probability change promotion effect and it has already been notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability change, the second probability change promotion effect is not executed.

  When the second probability change promotion effect is started, a meter is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as shown in (8). Further, a sentence “Please press the button in this range if you want to be promoted to certain change!” Is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as a character line (step S1925). The measurement of the production period is started from this point (step S1983). In this embodiment, since the degree of operation difficulty is set lower in the second probability variation promotion effect than in the first probability variation promotion effect, as shown in (8), in the second probability change promotion effect, Even if the operation button 120 is operated between the point at which the meter level reaches the maximum and before the predetermined margin, it is determined that the promotion to the probability change has succeeded. That is, the operation of the operation button 120 is easier than in the case of the first probability change promotion effect. Note that, for example, the operation of the operation button 120 may be made easier by slowing the speed at which the meter level increases as compared with the case of the first probability change promotion effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in (2) (8) and (11) described later, the indication that the operation button 120 is operated at the maximum point of the meter of the variable display device 9 and the level of the meter are The display of operating the operation button 120 between the maximum point and the predetermined margin is equivalent to the display for notifying the operation difficulty level set in the effect mode determination process. For example, the operation difficulty level may be notified by displaying a value indicating the operation difficulty level on the screen of the variable display device 9, and a meter for indicating the operation difficulty level is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9. The degree of difficulty of operation may be reported by displaying and changing the level of the meter.

  As shown in (9), display is performed such that the level of the meter gradually increases (steps S1925, S1938 to S1940), similar to the first probability change promotion effect. As shown in (9), when the player operates the operation button 120, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied (step S1929). In the example shown in (9), since the operation button 120 is operated before the point that is a predetermined margin away from the point where the meter level becomes maximum, it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition is not satisfied. (N in step S1929). Then, as shown in (10), on the screen of the variable display device 9, a sentence “Sorry! Probability promotion failure, then do your best” is displayed as a character line (step S1950). Such a display corresponds to a display indicating that the display has not been promoted to certainty. If the operation button 120 has never been operated by the player, when a predetermined performance period has elapsed (N in step S1937), a message indicating that the player has not been promoted to probability is displayed as shown in (7). (Step S1950), the probable promotion effect is terminated.

  Next, when it becomes round 15 of the jackpot game, the third probability change promotion effect is started (steps S1977 to S1984). If it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition has been established in the first or second probability variation promotion effect and it has already been notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability variation, the third probability variation promotion effect is not executed.

  When the third probability change promotion effect is started, a meter is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as shown in (11). Further, a sentence “Please press the button in this range if you want to be promoted to certain change!” Is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as a character line (step S1925). The measurement of the production period is started from this point (step S1983). In this embodiment, since the degree of operation difficulty is set lower in the third probability variation promotion effect than in the first and second probability variation promotion effects, as shown in (11), the third probability modification promotion is set. In the production, even if the operation button 120 is operated between the point at which the meter level is maximized and before the predetermined margin, it is determined that the promotion to the probability change has been successful. That is, the operation of the operation button 120 becomes easier compared to the first and second probability variation promotion effects. Note that, for example, the operation of the operation button 120 may be made easier by slowing the speed at which the meter level increases as compared to the first and second probability change promotion effects.

  As shown in (12), display is performed such that the level of the meter gradually rises (steps S1925, S1938 to S1940), as in the first and second probability variation promotion effects. As shown in (12), when the player operates the operation button 120, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied (step S1929). In the example shown in (12), since the operation button 120 is operated between the point at which the meter level is maximum and the point before the predetermined margin, it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. (Y in step S1929). Then, as shown in (13), a sentence “Superb, Success!” Is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as a character line. It is displayed (step S1930). Such a display corresponds to a display indicating that the display has been promoted to certainty.

  Note that even if the operation button 120 is operated between the point at which the meter level reaches the maximum and the point before the predetermined margin, it is determined that the probability variation big hit is not determined (that is, the normal big hit) (When it is determined in advance) (N in step S1928), the display of the fact that it has been promoted to probability change is not performed. In this case, for example, even if the operation button 120 is actually operated between the point at which the level of the meter is maximum and the point before the predetermined margin, the point at which the meter is maximum on the variable display device 9 It is possible to display as if it has returned to the minimum point after passing through, and display such as “Sorry!

  Further, when a predetermined promotion condition is established, for example, all symbols may be re-varied in a state where the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol. At this time, the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol may be distinguished and displayed so that the player can clearly see the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol. For example, the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol may be displayed in different forms, or the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol may be displayed in different colors (for example, the probability variation symbol is red and the non-probability variation symbol is blue).

  After that, the variable display device 9 may display the fact that the probability variation symbol has been aligned as the left middle right symbol, and then display the fact that it has been promoted to probability variation as shown in (14). Then, after the big hit game is over, the player can recognize that the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

  In addition, if the operation button 120 is not successfully operated in the third probability change promotion effect (N in Step S1929, Y in S1942), as shown in (15), the screen of the variable display device 9 is displayed. A sentence “Maybe it has changed” is displayed as a character line (step S1944). Such a display corresponds to a display for notifying the expected degree of promotion to probability change. Note that if the player has never operated the operation button 120 through the three probable change promotion effects, the display for notifying the expected degree of advancement to the probable change is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player an impression that the player will not be promoted to probability unless the operation button 120 is operated during the probability variation promotion effect, and to improve the player's willingness to participate in the probability variation promotion effect. Can do.

  In the probable promotion effect, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are changed using the variable display device 9, and the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed based on the detection of the ON signal from the operation button 120. A probable promotion promotion effect may be performed by executing the effect. Further, for example, when the gaming machine is provided with three middle left and right rotary drums (rotary reels) that are rotationally driven by a drum motor, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the left middle right in the probability variation promotion effect. Probability promotion effect may be performed by rotating the rotating drum.

  FIG. 75 and FIG. 76 are explanatory diagrams showing a display example of a probable promotion effect performed by rotating the left middle right rotating drum when the gaming machine includes three left middle right rotating drums (rotating reels). is there. 75 and 76 illustrate the case where the probability variation promotion effect is performed using the rotating drum, but the probability variation promotion effect may also be performed by changing the left middle right symbol using the variable display device 9. It is the same. Further, when performing the probable change promotion effect using the rotating drum, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the variable display device 9 to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable symbol variable display. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the predetermined production by rotating the rotating drum only when executing the probability variation promotion production.

  75 and 76, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3). 75 and 76 are executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100. 75 and 76, an example will be described in which the probability variation promotion effect is executed by determining the number of effects as 3 times during the big hit game round. The same applies to the case where the probability variation promotion effect is executed by determining the number of performances to be 4 or 2 during the big hit game round, and the case where the probability change promotion effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit game ends.

  As a precondition, it is assumed that the game control microcomputer 560 determines that it is a big hit in the big hit determination and determines that it is a probable big hit. Furthermore, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the probable promotion effect during the big hit game round. In response to this, a probability variation jackpot designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Further, in response to the fact that the game control microcomputer 560 has determined the variation pattern, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern effect control command (variation pattern command) to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The microcomputer 100 for effect control receives the command for determining the probability change jackpot with the probability change promotion during round, and sets the flag for the probability change jackpot effect and also sets the flag for the probability change promotion execution during the round. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command to save the variation pattern and sets the variation pattern reception flag. Further, since execution of the probability variation promotion effect during the round is designated, the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol (big hit symbol). Moreover, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the production mode determination process (step S705), determines the number of productions of the promotion effect during the round (step S546), and determines the operation difficulty level in each execution round (step S546). S548). In the example shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the number of effects is determined to be 3, and the effect execution rounds are determined to be rounds 11, 13, and 15, respectively. In addition, the operation difficulty level in round 11 is determined to be 5, the operation difficulty level in round 13 is determined to be 3, and the operation difficulty level in round 15 is determined to be 1.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (1), when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation (variable display) of the left, middle, and right rotating drums has started, the fluctuation is temporarily stopped and the big probability of the non-probable variable symbol determined in step S1649 is reached. The symbol (stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in (1), the non-probable variation pattern “222” is derived and displayed on the rotating drum. After that, the game shifts to the big hit game state, and the big hit games from round 1 to round 15 are executed. When it is round 11 of the big hit game, the first probability change promotion effect is started. When the first probability change promotion effect is started, as shown in (2), the left, middle and right rotating drums are changed. The measurement of the production period is started from this point (step S1983).

  As shown in (3), when the operation button 120 is pressed once by the player, the rotation of the left rotating drum is stopped. Also, as shown in (4), when the player presses the operation button 120 once again, the rotation of the right rotating drum is stopped. Then, as shown in (5), when the operation button 120 is pressed again by the player, the rotation of the rotating drum inside is stopped.

  As shown in (5), when all the left, middle and right rotating drums are stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied (step S1929). In this case, for example, when the operation button 120 is pressed at a predetermined timing, it is determined that a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied, and the stop symbols shown on the left, middle, and right rotating drums are aligned in the horizontal or diagonal direction with the same symbol. It stops in the state. In the example shown in (5), it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition has not been established without stopping when the stop symbols shown on the left, middle and right rotating drums are aligned with the same symbol (N in step S1929). The state in which the stop symbols shown on the left, middle, and right rotating drums are not aligned with the same symbol corresponds to a display that the promotion has not been promoted. If the player has never operated the operation button 120, when the predetermined production period has elapsed (Y in step S1937), for example, the stop symbol shown in the left middle right rotating drum is the same symbol. It stops in the state where it does not arrange (step S1950), and a probable change promotion effect is complete | finished.

  Next, when it becomes round 13 of the big hit game, the second probability change promotion effect is started. If it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition has been established in the first probability change promotion effect and it has already been notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability change, the second probability change promotion effect is not executed.

  When the second probability change promotion effect is started, as shown in (6), the left, middle and right rotating drums are changed again. The measurement of the production period is started from this point (step S1983). In this embodiment, since the operation difficulty level is set lower in the second probability variation promotion effect than in the first probability variation promotion effect, in the second probability variation promotion effect, for example, in the first probability variation promotion effect, As compared with the case of the above, the rotation speed of the left middle right rotating drum is controlled to be slower. That is, the operation of the operation button 120 is easier than in the case of the first probability change promotion effect. Note that, for example, compared to the case of the first probability change promotion effect, the range of the number of frames (number of symbols) allowed from when the player operates the operation button 120 until the rotating drum finally stops is changed. For example, the operation of the operation button 120 may be facilitated. In this case, for example, even if the operation button 120 is not operated at the timing of stopping when the stop symbols of the left, middle and right rotating drums are aligned in the same pattern, the operation is performed within the allowable number of frames. If it is, the production control microcomputer 100 has stopped the rotating drum in a state where the left, middle and right stop symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and has successfully operated the operation button 120 at a predetermined timing? Produce like this.

  As shown in (7), when the player presses the operation button 120 once, the rotation of the left rotating drum is stopped. As shown in (8), when the player presses the operation button 120 once again, the rotation of the right rotating drum is stopped. As shown in (9), when the player presses the operation button 120 again, the rotation of the rotating drum inside is stopped.

  As shown in (9), when all the left, middle and right rotating drums are stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied (step S1929). In this case, for example, when the stop symbols shown on the left, middle, and right rotating drums are stopped in a state where the same symbols are aligned in the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction, it is determined that a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied. In the example shown in (9), since the stop symbols shown on the left, middle and right rotating drums are stopped in a state where they are diagonally aligned with the same symbol, it is determined that a predetermined promotion condition is satisfied (in step S1929). Y). A state in which the stop symbols shown on the left, middle, and right rotating drums are stopped together with the same symbol corresponds to an indication that the probability has been promoted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, it is determined that the predetermined promotion condition is established in the second probability variation promotion effect, and it is already notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability variation. However, the third probable promotion effect is not executed. If it is not notified that the first and second probability variation promotion effects have been promoted to probability variation, the third probability variation promotion effect is executed when round 15 of the jackpot game is reached.

  In addition, even when the operation button 120 is operated at the timing when the stop symbols shown on the left, middle and right rotating drums are aligned with the same symbol, it is determined that the probability variation big hit is not made (that is, the normal big hit) If it is determined in advance (N in Step S1928), the display indicating that the promotion has been promoted to probability change is not performed. In this case, for example, even if the operation button 120 is actually operated at the timing when the stop symbols are aligned with the same symbol, the control is performed so that the rotating drum in the middle excessively stops for several frames (for example, one frame). The stop symbols shown on the left, middle, and right rotating drums may be prevented from stopping when the same symbols are aligned.

  Also, if the operation button 120 is not successfully operated in the third probability change promotion effect (N in step S1929, Y in S1942), a combination of predetermined stop symbols for announcing the expected degree of promotion to probability change Stop the left, middle, and right rotating drums so that For example, if the stop symbol shown in the middle left rotating drum stops at "7" and the right rotating drum stops at the cherry symbol, the combination of stop symbols will be announced in advance to the degree of expectation of promotion to probability change. It is determined that this is a combination of stop symbols (so-called chance eyes). If the operation button 120 is not successfully operated even in the third probability variation promotion effect even though the probability variation big hit is determined in advance, the left, middle and right rotating drums are shown in (10). Control is performed so that the combination of stop symbols shown in FIG. 5 stops at “7” and “7” and cherry symbols. Such a display corresponds to a display for notifying the expected degree of promotion to probability change. Note that if the player has never operated the operation button 120 through the three probable change promotion effects, the display for notifying the expected degree of advancement to the probable change is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player an impression that the player will not be promoted to probability unless the operation button 120 is operated during the probability variation promotion effect, and to improve the player's willingness to participate in the probability variation promotion effect. Can do.

  In this embodiment, in the effect mode determination process, the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during round executed later is set to be lower than the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during round executed first. However, the method of setting the operation difficulty level is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may be set such that the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during the round executed later is higher than the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during the round executed first. In addition, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level so as to increase once every time the promotion effect during the round is repeated, and then decreases the operation difficulty level every time the promotion effect during the round is repeated. You may set so that.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the operation difficulty level set in step S547. In the example shown in FIG. 77, when the number of effects of promotion effect during the round is determined to be 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round (ie, round 9) to 1. The operation difficulty level of the second round (ie, round 11) is set to 2, the operation difficulty level of the third round (ie, round 13) is set to 4, and the operation level of the fourth round (ie, round 15) is set. Set the difficulty level to 5. In addition, when the number of effects of promotion effect during the round is determined to be 3, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round (that is, round 11) to 1 and sets the second round ( That is, the operation difficulty level in round 13) is set to 3, and the operation difficulty level in the third round (that is, round 15) is set to 5. In addition, when the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round is determined to be 2, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round (that is, round 10) to 2 and sets the second round ( That is, the operation difficulty level of round 15) is set to 4. Thus, the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during the round executed later may be set to be higher than the operation difficulty level of the promotion effect during the round executed first.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the operation difficulty level set in step S547. In the example shown in FIG. 78, when the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round is determined to be 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round (ie, round 9) to 3. The operation difficulty level of the second round (ie, round 11) is set to 5, the operation difficulty level of the third round (ie, round 13) is set to 4, and the operation of the fourth round (ie, round 15) is set. Set the difficulty level to 2. In addition, when the number of effects of the promotion effect during the round is determined to be 3, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the operation difficulty level of the first round (that is, round 11) to 3, and the second round ( That is, the operation difficulty level of round 13) is set to 5, and the operation difficulty level of the third round (that is, round 15) is set to 3. As described above, the operation difficulty level may be set to be once higher every time the number of promotion effects during the round is repeated, and then the operation difficulty level may be set to be lower each time the number of promotion effects during the round is increased. .

  Also, in this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation stop process, the case where the fanfare effect is executed by selecting the same process data when suddenly determined to be a big hit and when determined to be a big hit is described. However, an effect to be executed may be selected using a different effect determination table.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. Note that the processing from step S1860 to S1880b is the same as those shown in FIGS. If the sudden probability change big hit effect flag or the small hit effect flag is set, the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines the fanfare effect when the sudden probability change big hit effect flag is set (Y in step S1880C). As a table for that purpose, a sudden change-in-effect production determination table is selected (step S1880D). When the sudden change big hit effect flag is not set suddenly (that is, when the small hit effect flag is set (N in Step S1880C), a table for determining the effect at the time of the small hit is used as a table for determining the fanfare effect. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a fanfare effect based on the selected effect determination table, selects process data corresponding to the selected fanfare effect (step S1880F), and step S1880E. The process moves to S1881.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect determination table for determining a fanfare effect at the time of sudden probability big hit or small hit. FIG. 80 (A) is a sudden probability change effect determination table for determining a fanfare effect when sudden probability change is a big hit. FIG. 80B is a table for determining the effect at the time of small hitting for determining the fanfare effect at the time of small hitting. In the example shown in FIG. 80, the type of fanfare effect to be executed is set in association with the random value range. As shown in FIG. 80 (A), when suddenly probable big hit is determined, the A effect is selected at a higher rate than the B effect among the two fanfare effects. Also, as shown in FIG. (B), when it is determined that a small hit, the B effect is selected at a higher rate than the A effect. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a fanfare effect according to the process data corresponding to the selected A effect or B effect (see step S903). In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the effect for a predetermined period by causing different background colors or different characters to appear on the display screen when the effect A is executed and when the effect B is executed. The effect control microcomputer 100 may determine the effect pattern based on the effect determination table shown above when the opening / closing control of the big winning opening based on the probability variation big hit or the small hit is finished. Then, after the opening / closing control of the big winning opening based on the sudden change big hit or the small hit is finished, the production may be executed for a predetermined period based on the decided production pattern.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to increase the rate at which the A performance is executed suddenly when the odd variation is a big hit, and the reliability that the player may suddenly change the big odds when performing the A production to the player. Can be increased.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when the variation pattern command designating the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received, but the display result command cannot be received from the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display device 9 A non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the decoration symbol. With such a configuration, even when the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the display result command, the player can recognize the display result of the decorative symbol display, and the player can recognize the display result. It is possible to prevent unnecessarily disadvantages.

  For example, if no display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 because the display result command could not be received even though it was determined to be a big hit, the player would recognize the display result of the decorative symbol display. Can not do it. For this reason, although it is a big hit, it is delayed to realize that it is a big hit, and there is a possibility that the player cannot sufficiently obtain the profit that should be originally obtained in the big hit gaming state. In a conventional gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-317092, the game control means separately sends an effect control command for designating a stop symbol of the left middle right decoration symbol to the effect control means. Send. For this reason, the effect control means cannot specify the display result when one of the effect control commands for designating the stop symbol of the left middle right decorative symbol cannot be received, and the initial appearance is not specified. It can only display symbols. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player cannot sufficiently obtain the profit that should be originally obtained in the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, when a variation pattern command designating probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received, it can be recognized that at least big hit, so that the production control microcomputer 100 can receive the display result command. Even if it is not possible to recognize whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, the non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed. By doing so, you can make the player recognize that it is at least a big hit,

  In this embodiment, a command indicating a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is not transmitted separately for each symbol, but a single display result command indicating a display result of a variable display (big hit or miss) is transmitted. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can determine whether or not it is a big hit based on one display result command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted by the game control means can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control means can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the probability change promotion effect which notifies whether it was promoted to probability change after shifting to the jackpot game state is executed. By having such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation whether or not to be promoted to probability change for a long time, and to give excitement that it is not known when the probability change promotion effect will be executed. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the probability variation promotion effect when the jackpot gaming state is ended, it is compared with the case where it is determined not to execute the probability variation promotion effect when the jackpot gaming state is ended. Thus, a long period is selected as the production period of the ending production. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ending effect is executed unnecessarily for a long time when the probability variation promotion effect is not executed when the big hit gaming state is ended.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the probability variation promotion effect for notifying that the promotion has been promoted to the probability change, based on the reception of the ending command designating the probability change big hit. With such a configuration, even when the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the display result command, it can be notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability change. Therefore, the internal state and the display state of the gaming machine can be matched without increasing the control burden of the gaming control microcomputer 560. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a probable state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the player has been disadvantaged as compared with the case of notifying that the probability change is not actually made after notifying that the probability change has occurred.

  Further, in this embodiment, based on the reception of the fanfare command designating the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation promotion effect for notifying the promotion to probability variation is executed. With such a configuration, even when the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the display result command, it can be notified that the promotion has been promoted to probability change. Therefore, the internal state and the display state of the gaming machine can be matched without increasing the control burden of the gaming control microcomputer 560. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a probable state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the player has been disadvantaged as compared with the case of notifying that the probability change is not actually made after notifying that the probability change has occurred.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is notified that the probability change promotion effect has been promoted to the probability change promotion effect, the execution of the probability change promotion effect is prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability variation promotion effect is executed even though the probability variation promotion effect has already been notified in the probability variation promotion effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, although the variation pattern command specified by the small hit is received, when the display result command cannot be received from the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display device 9 is suddenly displayed with the same display result as the probability variation big hit. Derived display. Therefore, even when the same display result as the sudden probability change big hit is derived and displayed, it is possible to create a case of sudden transition to the probability variation state and a case of not transitioning, and to improve the interest of the game for the player .

Further, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern command specified by sudden probability change big hit or a variation pattern command specified by small hit is received from the game control microcomputer 560, an effect pattern in which it is impossible to specify whether or not sudden change has occurred is created. Using this, variable display of the decorative design of the variable display device 9 is executed. Therefore, even if the running variable display using the same performance pattern, be able to make and if no transition when migrating suddenly probability variation state, improve the interest in the game to the player it can.

In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines a part of the production contents using the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. Also good. For example, when the variable display device 9 performs variable display of the decorative pattern of the reach mode, the production control microcomputer 100 matches the predetermined random number for determining the announcement production execution with one predetermined value. May be determined to perform a notice effect. It should be noted that the production control microcomputer 100 may determine whether or not to perform the notice effect using random 1 regardless of whether or not the variable display of the reach mode is performed. In addition, when performing the announcement effect, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the type of the announcement effect performed using the variable display device 9 using a predetermined random number for determining the announcement effect type.

  Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine whether or not to change the production mode. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect in different effect modes according to the type of the current game state. For example, according to whether or not the game state is a high base state, a game effect is performed in different effect modes. Further, when the gaming state changes at the time of the big hit, for example, based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31, the production mode for performing the game production is changed. In this case, if it is determined to change the effect mode by determination using a predetermined effect change determination random number, the effect mode is changed regardless of the current game state, and the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. Is called. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines to change the effect mode when, for example, a predetermined effect change determination random number matches one predetermined value. Furthermore, when changing the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 may determine which effect mode to change to by using a predetermined post-change effect determining random number.

  In this embodiment, a case has been described in which a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols when the variation pattern command designated by jackpot is received but the display result command cannot be received. When the display result command cannot be correctly received after receiving the jackpot-designated variation pattern command due to garbled data or the like, the non-probable variation symbol may be derived and displayed as the display result of the decorative symbol variable display. For example, if the command received after receiving the jackpot-designated variation pattern command does not match any of the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the decorative pattern variable display result. A non-probable variation pattern may be derived and displayed.

  Further, for example, when the display result command is received but the specified content of the variation pattern command and the specified content of the display result command do not match, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not display the display result of the variable design variable display. The probability variation pattern may be derived and displayed. For example, when a display result command specifying a loss is received even though a variation pattern command specifying a jackpot is received, the production control microcomputer 100 displays an uncertain variable pattern as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols. It may be derived and displayed. Further, for example, when a display result command for small hits is received despite suddenly receiving a variation pattern command for specifying a promiscuous big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a display result for variable display of decorative symbols. As shown in FIG.

  When the display result command is received but the specified content of the variation pattern command does not match the specified content of the display result command, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the content specified in the display result command as it is. Alternatively, content that is disadvantageous to the player may be displayed for the time being, and then displayed based on the specified content of the effect control command (for example, fanfare command or ending command) received thereafter. For example, when the designation content of the variation pattern command and the designation content of the display result command do not match, the production control microcomputer 100 displays “out” for the time being, and then receives the production control command designating the jackpot May be displayed by replacing “out of” with “big hit”.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 may determine whether the received command is a normal effect control command in the command analysis process. In this case, for example, when the production control microcomputer 100 reads the received command in step S1612, the second byte of the MODE data of the received command is not 80 (H) or 8C (H). The received command including the EXT data may be discarded. That is, since it is not a regular effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 discards the received command as it is.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a predetermined flag when sudden probability big hit or small hit suddenly occurs (when a sudden variation designation or small hit designation variation pattern command or display result command is received), and suddenly When displaying a variation of the decorative symbol after the probability variation big hit or small hit is completed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed using an effect pattern that cannot be specified as to whether the probability variation state is present. In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the variable display device 9 to display a background color different from the probability variation state, or scrolls the ornament symbol in a direction different from the probability variation state, thereby changing the decoration symbol. The display may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the display result command for designating the sudden probability variation big hit is transmitted when the sudden probability variation big hit is determined has been shown. Even in such a case, the same display result command as the display result command for designating a normal probability variation big hit (15 round probability variation big hit) may be transmitted. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 can derive and display the jackpot symbol for sudden probability change based on, for example, receiving the variation pattern command designating sudden probability variation jackpot.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect control board 80 is used to control all effect means (the variable display device 9, the sound output device (speaker) 27, and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c). However, each rendering means may be controlled using separate control boards. A second embodiment including a sound / lamp control board that controls the sound output device 27 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c and a symbol control board that controls the variable display device 9 will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 81 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the sound / lamp control board 80b, and the symbol control board 80a in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80b performs sound output control of the sound output device 27 and display control of each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. The symbol control board 80a performs display control of the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, “effect control” means display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. It means performing such as. In this embodiment, the effect control means includes a symbol control microcomputer 100a that performs display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. This is realized by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. In this embodiment, the display control means is realized by a symbol control microcomputer 100 a that controls the variable display device 9. The electric component control means is realized by a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b that controls the speaker 27 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c.

  The sound / lamp control board 80b is mounted with a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b including a sound / lamp control CPU 101b and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the sound / lamp control board 80b, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown).

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver 352. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the button lamp 130. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesizing IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the sound / lamp controlling microcomputer 100b, the lamp driver 352, and the voice synthesis IC 173. Communication).

  The symbol control board 80a is equipped with a symbol control microcomputer 100a including a symbol control CPU 101a and RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the symbol control board 80a, the symbol control microcomputer 100a operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command received from the sound / lamp control board 80b. .

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560. The character ROM stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. Is. The symbol control microcomputer 100 a outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the symbol control board 80a. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the symbol control microcomputer 100a, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  The symbol control microcomputer 100 a receives an effect control command via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to a strobe signal (effect control INT signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. .

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the symbol control board 80a. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the symbol control board 80a (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the symbol control board 80a to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, a signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in a direction toward the symbol control board 80a (a signal is not passed in the direction from the symbol control board 80a to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 81 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Moreover, the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines the contents of the effect to be performed using the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (for example, the variation pattern command). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100 a determines whether or not to perform a notice effect using the variable display device 9. For example, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a determines the type of the notice effect using the variable display device 9.

  The “notice effect” is an effect for informing the player in advance (before the decorative symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9) that it is a big hit or is likely to be a big hit. Say. For example, the player is informed that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing a different mode (speed, direction of rotation, etc.) or making a character appear during the change.

  Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a transmits an effect control command (a variation pattern command or a display result designation command) from the main board 31 to the sound / lamp control board 80 b via the input / output port 104. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a transmits the generated effect content designation command to the sound / lamp control board 80 b via the input / output port 104.

  Note that the symbol control microcomputer 100a may add the determined contents (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the kind of the notice effect) to the effect control command (a variation pattern command or a display result designation command). . Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a may transmit an effect control command to which the effect content is added to the sound / lamp control board 80 b via the input / output port 104. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the first 4 bits in the EXT data of each variation pattern command (8000 (H) to 800B (H)) are all “0”. When adding the effect contents to the variation pattern command, the symbol control microcomputer 100a adds, for example, a value capable of specifying the determined effect contents to the first 4-bit portion of the EXT data, and the sound / lamp control board. You may transmit to 80b.

  Next, the operation of the symbol control microcomputer 100a will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a according to the second embodiment. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a starts main processing. In the main process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval ( Step S781). Thereafter, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a shifts to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S782). When a timer interrupt occurs, the symbol control microcomputer 100a sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a clears the flag (step S783) and executes the following symbol control process.

  A timer interrupt takes, for example, every 2 ms. That is, the symbol control process is activated every 2 ms, for example. In this embodiment, only the flag is set in the timer interrupt process, and the specific symbol control process is executed in the main process. However, the symbol control process may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  In the symbol control process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S784). In this case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs the same processing as the command analysis processing (command analysis processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 shown in FIGS. 48 and 49) shown in the first embodiment. The effect control command is analyzed according to

  Next, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs effect content determination processing (step S785). In the effect content determination process, the design control microcomputer 100a uses the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command) to determine whether or not to perform the notice effect. , Type of notice effect). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content.

  Next, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a performs sound output processing (step S786). In this case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a outputs sound number data (for example, sound number data corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command) to the speech synthesis IC 173. Then, the voice synthesis IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175.

  Next, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs an effect mode determination process (step S786). In this case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs processing according to the same process as the effect mode determination process (the effect mode determination process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 50) shown in the first embodiment. Run. Next, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs symbol control process processing (step S787). In this case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs processing according to the same processing as the effect control process shown in the first embodiment (the effect control process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 53). Run.

  Then, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a executes a process of updating the random number counter (step S788). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs a process of sending the effect control command received from the main board 31 and the effect content designation command generated in the effect content determination process in step S785 to the sound / lamp control board 80b ( Command control processing: Step S789). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S782.

  An INT signal for effect control from the main board 31 is input to an interrupt terminal of the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, the design control microcomputer 100a is interrupted. Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100a executes the effect control command reception process in the interrupt process. In the effect control command reception process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a stores the received effect control command data in the command reception buffer.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number used in the symbol control process in the second embodiment. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to execute the notice effect (for determining the notice effect execution). In this embodiment, when the variable display device 9 performs variable display of the decorative pattern of the reach mode, the symbol control microcomputer 100a, for example, when random 1 matches one predetermined value, Decides to perform a notice effect. Note that the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a may determine whether or not to perform the notice effect using random 1 regardless of whether or not the variable display of the reach mode is performed.
(2) Random 2: When performing the notice effect, the type of the notice effect performed using the variable display device 9 is determined (for determining the notice effect type).

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process (step S785) shown in FIG. In the effect content determination process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S1851).

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the symbol control microcomputer 100a resets the variation pattern command reception flag, and specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines whether or not the variable display to be executed using the variable display device 9 is a variation accompanied by reach based on the identified variation pattern (step S1852). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a is a variation pattern in which the variation pattern shown in the received variation pattern command is a pattern with reach (for example, the variation pattern of EXT data “01H” to “09H” shown in FIG. 29). ), The symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines that the fluctuation is accompanied by reach. If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set in step S1851, the symbol control microcomputer 100a ends the process as it is.

  If it is determined that the change is accompanied by reach, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the random number for determining the notice effect execution (random 1) (step S1853). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines to perform a notice effect using the variable display device 9 when the random 1 matches a predetermined value. If the change is not accompanied by reach in step S1852, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a ends the process as it is.

  When it is determined in step S1854 that the notice effect is not performed, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a receives the variation pattern command and the display result designation command when receiving the variation pattern command and the display result designation command. The command is transferred to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, and the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b executes a game effect using the speaker and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. In this case, when it is determined in step S1854 that the notice effect is not performed, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates a notification command for designating that the notice effect is not performed, and transmits the notification command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b ( Step S1857).

  If it is determined that the notice effect is to be performed (step S1854), the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines the type of the notice effect to be performed using the variable display device 9 based on the notice effect type determination random number (random 2). (Step S1855). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines, based on the random number 2, how fast the decorative symbol is changed and in which rotation direction the decorative symbol is changed in the notice effect. Decide which character to appear. If it is determined in step S1854 that the notice effect is not to be executed, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a ends the process as it is.

  Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs a process of transmitting the produced effect content designation command to the sound / lamp control board 80b (step S1856). The symbol control microcomputer 100a transfers (sends) the display result designation command and the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560 to the sound / lamp control board 80b together with the effect content designation command. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b of the sound / lamp control board 80b is configured so that the speaker 27 and each lamp are based on the effect content designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation pattern command received from the symbol control microcomputer 100a. A game effect using 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c is performed.

  In step S 1856, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100 a may add the determined effect content to the variation pattern command or the display result specifying command instead of generating the effect content specifying command. For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a adds the production content to the variation pattern command or the display result designation command by adding a value indicating the production content to the header portion of the command. In this case, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portion of only the variation pattern command, or may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portion of only the display result designation command. Good. Furthermore, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portions of both the variation pattern command and the display result designation command. Then, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a may perform a process of transmitting a variation pattern command or a display result designation command to which the effect contents are added to the sound / lamp control board 80b. When the notice effect is not performed, the symbol control microcomputer 100a directly transfers the variation pattern command and the display result designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560 to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. It will be.

  Further, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the address of the transmission table is set in step S1856, the command control process (see step S789) in the symbol control main process is executed, so that the effect content designation command is sounded. / Sent to the lamp control board 80b.

  In this embodiment, in the effect content determination process, the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the content of the notice effect are determined. However, it may be determined whether or not to change the effect mode. . For example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs a game effect in different effect modes according to the type of the current game state. For example, according to whether or not the game state is a high base state, a game effect is performed in different effect modes. Further, when the gaming state changes at the time of the big hit, for example, based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31, the production mode for performing the game production is changed. In this case, if it is determined to change the effect mode by determination using a predetermined effect change determination random number, the effect mode is changed regardless of the current game state, and the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. Is called. Note that the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines to change the effect mode when, for example, a predetermined effect change determination random number matches a predetermined value. Furthermore, when changing the effect mode, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may determine which effect mode to change to by using a predetermined post-change effect determining random number.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the variation pattern command designating the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received, but the display result command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. When it cannot be received, the non-probability variable symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 as the decorative symbol stop symbol. With this configuration, even when the symbol control microcomputer 100a cannot receive the display result command, the player can recognize the display result of the variable symbol display, and the player can recognize the display result. It is possible to prevent unnecessarily disadvantages. Furthermore, since the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines at least a part of the contents of the game effect using each effect means based on the command received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game control microcomputer 560 The control burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, as an example of controlling each effect means using separate control boards, the effect received by the symbol control microcomputer 100a mounted on the symbol control board 80a from the game control microcomputer 560. Although the case where the control command is transferred to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80b has been described, the embodiment in which each rendering means is controlled using separate control boards is described in this embodiment. It is not limited to those shown in. For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may first receive an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 and transfer it to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing another circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the sound / lamp control board 80b, and the symbol control board 80a. In the example shown in FIG. 85, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines the contents of effects to be performed using the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (for example, the variation pattern command). For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uses the variable display device 9 to determine whether to perform a notice effect. Further, for example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines the type of the notice effect using the variable display device 9.

  In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b transmits an effect control command (a variation pattern command or a display result designation command) from the main board 31 to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b transmits the generated effect content designation command to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104.

  Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b adds the determined contents (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect) to the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command). Also good. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b may transmit an effect control command to which the effect content is added to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the first 4 bits in the EXT data of each variation pattern command (8000 (H) to 800B (H)) are all “0”. When adding the effect content to the variation pattern command, the symbol control microcomputer 100a adds, for example, a value capable of specifying the determined effect content to the first 4-bit portion of the EXT data, and applies it to the symbol control board 80a. You may send it.

  The operation of the sound / lamp control means (sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) shown in FIG. 86 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b (specifically, the sound / lamp control CPU 101b) mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80b. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b starts main processing. In the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval, and the like. This is performed (step S881). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b shifts to a loop process for checking the timer interrupt flag (step S882). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b clears the flag (step S883) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  A timer interrupt takes, for example, every 2 ms. That is, the sound / lamp control process is activated every 2 ms, for example. In this embodiment, only the flag is set in the timer interrupt process, and the specific sound / lamp control process is executed in the main process, but the sound / lamp control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. Also good.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S884).

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs an effect content determination process (step S885). In the effect content determination process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uses the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command) (whether or not to perform the notice effect). Kaya, the type of notice effect). In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content.

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs sound output processing (step S886). In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b outputs sound number data (for example, sound number data corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command) to the speech synthesis IC 703. Then, the voice synthesis IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705.

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs lamp display processing (step S887). In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs lamp control based on the lamp control execution data set in the process data.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b executes a process of updating the random number counter (step S888). Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs a process of sending the effect control command received from the main board 31 and the effect content designation command generated in the effect content determination process in step S885 to the symbol control board 80a ( Command control processing: Step S889). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S882.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of an effect control command sent from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. Hereinafter, the effect control command sent from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b to the symbol control microcomputer 100a is also referred to as a sound / lamp side effect control command. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may transmit the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 as it is to the symbol control microcomputer 100a as the sound / lamp-side effect control command. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates the sound / lamp side effect control command shown in FIG. 87 based on the reception of the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560, and the symbol control microcomputer. You may transmit to 100a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 87, commands 7000 (H) to 700B (H) are sound / lamp side effects for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a control command (sound / lamp side variation pattern command). Note that the sound / lamp side effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 7000 (H) to 700B (H), the variable display device 9 controls the variable display device 9 to start variable display of the decorative symbols.

  The command 7C00 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (sound / lamp side deviation designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is to be eliminated. The command 7C01 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (sound / lamp side normal big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a normal big hit. The command 7C02 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (sound / lamp side positive variation big hit designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a probability big hit.

  The command 7C03 (H) specifies that the display result of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is a probable big hit symbol, and also specifies a sound / special effect to be executed during the round of 15 rounds of big hit game. This is a lamp-side production control command (sound / lamp-side round probability variation big hit designation command with probability variation promotion). The command 7C04 (H) designates that the display result of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is a probability variation jackpot symbol, and a sound / lamp that designates execution of the probability variation promotion effect after the end of 15 rounds of the jackpot game. Side effect control command (a probability variation jackpot designation command with a probability change promotion after the end of the sound / lamp side jackpot). Command 7C05 (H) specifies that the display result of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is a probability variation jackpot symbol, and executes a probability variation promotion effect during the round of the 15 round jackpot game and after the jackpot game ends. Is a sound / lamp side effect control command (sound / lamp side probability variation promotion command with probability variation promotion).

  Sound / lamp-side effect control commands other than the sound / lamp-side effect control command shown in FIG. 87 are also transmitted from the sound / lamp-control microcomputer 100b to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. For example, a sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to each of the effect control commands shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a more detailed sound / lamp side effect control command related to the big hit game, and a sound / lamp side effect indicating the game state A control command (for example, a sound / lamp-side effect control command indicating an initialization command) is also transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In the gaming machine shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines whether the display result of the variable display of the decorative design of the variable display device 9 is a jackpot symbol according to the same processing as steps S1509, S1510, and S1514. Whether or not and whether or not to make a probable big hit. Further, according to the same processing as in steps S203, S204, S205, and S206, the variable display time from when the variable display of the decorative display on the variable display device 9 is started until the display result is derived and displayed is determined. Also, by executing steps S332 to S343 in accordance with the command transmission table shown in FIG. 46, a variation pattern command capable of specifying the determined variable display time is transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. In addition, by executing steps S332 to S343 according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. It transmits to the microcomputer 100b.

  The sound / lamp control microcomputer (electrical component control means) 100b receives the variation pattern command, and based on the received variation pattern command, the sound / lamp side variation pattern command (command 7000 shown in FIG. 87) can be specified. (H) to 700B (H)) are transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer (display control means) 100a (see step S889). The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b transmits a sound / lamp-side display result command capable of specifying the contents of the display result command to the symbol control microcomputer 100a based on the reception of the display result command ( Step S889).

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a follows the same processing as steps S826 to S828, S1843 to S1849, and S1872 based on the sound / lamp-side variation pattern command and the sound / lamp-side display result command. The display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the sound / lamp side variation pattern command.

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the variation pattern command, the variation that can be specified that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design of the variable display device 9 is determined to be a big hit as the variation pattern command. A pattern command (command commands 8004 (H) to 8009 (H), variable display command for specific display) is transmitted. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 560 can specify that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design of the variable display device 0 is determined not to be a big hit (variable pattern commands (commands 8000 (H) to 8003 (H)). , Variable display command for non-specific display).

The symbol control microcomputer 100a uses the probability change big hit symbol determination table selected in the same process as in step S1839 in the symbol control process, and the probability variation symbol determined in the same process as in step S1840 is the same as in step S1872. Derived and displayed by processing. In other words, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a wins the sound / lamp side variation pattern command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the variable display device 9. Sound / lamp side display result command (commands 7C02 (H) to 7C05 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the display result command that can be determined to be determined to be a probable big hit Is a probability change indicating that a transition to a probability change state will be made after the end of a specific gaming state as a big win symbol based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the sound / lamp side variation pattern command. The symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9.

  In addition, the symbol control microcomputer 100a uses the normal big hit symbol determination table selected in the same process as in step S1835 in the symbol control process, and the uncertain variable symbol determined in the same process as in step S1840. Derived and displayed by the same process as above. In other words, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a wins the sound / lamp side variation pattern command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the variable display device 9. And a sound / lamp side display result command (command 7C01 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of a display result command that can be determined to be determined to be a normal jackpot. Based on the fact that the variable display time specified by the sound / lamp side variation pattern command has elapsed, a variable display device that displays a non-probability variable symbol indicating that it does not shift to the probability variation state after the specific gaming state has ended as a big hit symbol 9 is derived and displayed.

  Further, when the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines that the symbol control process is N in the same process as in step S1861, the microcomputer 100a uses the normal time big hit symbol determination table selected in the same process as in step S1863. The uncertain variable symbol determined by the process similar to S1868 is derived and displayed by the process similar to step S1872. That is, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a receives the sound / lamp side variation pattern command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command, but cannot receive the sound / lamp side display result command. In some cases, based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the sound / lamp side variation pattern command, the non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9.

  If the symbol control microcomputer 100a cannot receive the sound / lamp side display result command, the sound / lamp side display result command cannot be received because the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b cannot receive the display result command. Both the case where the symbol control microcomputer 100a is not transmitted and the case where it is transmitted but the symbol control microcomputer 100a fails to receive the sound / lamp side display result command can be considered. Even in this case, when the sound / lamp side display result command cannot be received, the non-probability variable symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9.

  In this embodiment, as an example of controlling each presentation means using separate control boards, a case has been described in which a gaming machine includes a symbol control board 80a and a sound / lamp control board 80b. A plurality of control boards may be provided. For example, the gaming machine may include a symbol / sound control board that controls the variable display device 9 and the speaker 27, and a lamp control board that controls the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. In this case, the display control means is realized by a symbol / sound control microcomputer mounted on a symbol / sound control board for controlling the variable display device 9. The electric component control means is realized by a lamp control microcomputer mounted on a lamp control board that controls each lamp. In addition, the design / sound control microcomputer mounted on the design / sound control board determines the contents of the effect, and each effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 is sent to the lamp control microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board. May be transmitted, and an effect content designation command including the determined effect content may be transmitted. Further, for example, the gaming machine may include a symbol / lamp control board that controls the variable display device 9 and the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, and 28 c and a sound control board that controls the speaker 27. In this case, the display control means is realized by a symbol / lamp control microcomputer mounted on a symbol / lamp control board for controlling the variable display device 9. The electric component control means is realized by a sound control microcomputer mounted on a sound control board for controlling the speaker. In addition, the design / lamp control microcomputer mounted on the design / lamp control board determines the contents of the presentation, and the effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560 are sent to the sound control microcomputer mounted on the sound control board. May be transmitted, and an effect content designation command including the determined effect content may be transmitted.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of each of the above embodiments can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention is applied even to a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol variably displayed becomes a predetermined symbol combination. it can. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  The present invention can be applied to a game such as a pachinko game machine, and can be applied to a game of a gaming machine in which the game state can be controlled to a special game state such as a probability change state.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board and a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows one structural example of a random value memory circuit. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random value storage circuit, and the timing when a random value storage circuit outputs each signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map of the storage area in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map in a user program management area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of initial value change system setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a user program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a random number circuit setting program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement which CPU updates the value of random R or reads the value of random R, when the 1st random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement which CPU56 reads the value of random R, when the 2nd random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the special figure holding | maintenance memory with which the game control microcomputer is equipped, the jackpot determination table memory, a flag memory, and a start winning opening switch timer memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a jackpot determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number maximum value reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value change process. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random number circuit, and the timing when each signal is generated in a random number circuit. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit initial value update process. It is a flowchart which shows a count value permutation change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for jackpot symbol setting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of an effect control command control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a command transmission table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect mode determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production | presentation frequency determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation difficulty level set. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission timing of an effect control command when the big hit game of 15 rounds is performed, and the execution timing of a probability change promotion effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission timing of the production | presentation control command when not receiving a display result command, and the execution timing of a probability change promotion production. It is a timing chart showing the transmission timing and the production timing of the production control command when it is suddenly determined as a probable big hit. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the effect timing when it is determined as a small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect performed by rotating the left middle right rotating drum. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the probability change promotion effect performed by rotating the left middle right rotating drum. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the operation difficulty level set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the operation difficulty level set. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a decoration design change stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the effect determination table for determining a fanfare effect at the time of sudden change big hit or a small hit. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of the relay board | substrate in 2nd Embodiment, a sound / lamp control board, and a symbol control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for symbol control in 2nd Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number used by the symbol control process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows production content determination processing. It is a block diagram which shows the other circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, a sound / lamp control board, and a symbol control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for sound / lamp control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production control command sent from the sound / lamp control microcomputer to the symbol control microcomputer.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display 14 Start prize opening 31 Main board 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 120 Operation button 560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (7)

A specific gaming state that includes a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and that displays and displays a display result, and that is advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device And when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is more likely to be the specific display result compared to the normal state after the specific game state ends. A gaming machine that executes a post-transition notification effect for notifying whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after transitioning to the specific gaming state,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Of the electrical components used for the game effect, comprising at least display control means for controlling the display state of the variable display device,
The game control means includes
It is determined whether or not the display result of variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result, whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and whether or not the post-transition notification effect is executed. A pre-determination means;
Variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time from the start of variable display of the identification information in the variable display device until the display result is derived and displayed based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
Variable display command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display command capable of specifying the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means;
Display result command transmission means for transmitting a display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the prior determination means ;
An end notification command transmitting means for transmitting an end notification command for executing an end notification effect for notifying the end of the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state ends ;
The display control means includes
Based on the variable display command and the display result command, variable display of identification information of the variable display device is executed, and the variable display device is based on the fact that the variable display time specified by the variable display command has elapsed. Variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the display result,
A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the post-transition notification effect after transitioning to the specific gaming state ;
End notification execution means for executing the end notification effect based on the transmission of the end notification command ;
The variable display command transmission means is for a specific display that can specify that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is determined to be the specific display result by the prior determination means as the variable display command. A variable display command or a variable display command for non-specific display that can specify that the display result of variable display of identification information of the variable display device is determined not to be the specific display result is transmitted by the predetermining unit. ,
The variable display execution means includes
It is determined that the display result of variable display of identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied by the variable display command for specific display and the predetermining means. When the display result command capable of specifying that is received, the specific game state is ended as the specific display result based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the variable display command for specific display. A special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying a special display result on the variable display device, which indicates that the transition to the special gaming state is performed afterwards,
The specific display variable display command and the predetermining means are determined to change the display result of variable display of the identification information of the variable display device to the specific display result, and are determined not to satisfy the predetermined transition condition. When the display result command capable of specifying that is received, the specific game state is ended as the specific display result based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the variable display command for specific display. A non-special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying a non-special display result indicating that the state does not shift to the special gaming state afterwards on the variable display device;
The variable display specified by the variable display command when the variable display command for specific display and the display result command capable of specifying that the notification effect after the transition is determined to be executed by the predetermining means are received. Based on the passage of time, the non-special display result derivation display means at the time of notification effect execution after transition for deriving and displaying the non-special display result on the variable display device,
When the variable display command for specific display is received but the display result command cannot be received, the variable display device is informed based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the variable display command for specific display. A non-reception non-special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying the non-special display result,
The post-transition notification effect executing means is the post-transition notification effect execution in the specific gaming state that is transferred when the non-special display result is derived and displayed by the post-transition notification effect execution non-special display result derivation display means. the execution,
The end notification command transmission means is determined as the end notification command by the prior determination means to change the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device to the specific display result and the predetermined transition condition. It is determined that it is satisfied, or it is determined that the display result of variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result by the pre-determining means and that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied. Send a command that can identify
When the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device by the non-reception non-special display result derivation display unit, the display control unit is configured to display the variable display by the prior determination unit as the end notification command. Based on the transmission of a command capable of specifying that the display result of the variable display of the device identification information is the specific display result and that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine further comprising an end time notification effect executing means for executing an end time notification effect for notifying that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied as the end notification effect by the notification executing means . A specific gaming state that includes a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and that displays and displays a display result, and that is advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device And when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the display result of the variable display of the identification information is more likely to be the specific display result compared to the normal state after the specific game state ends. A gaming machine that executes a post-transition notification effect for notifying whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after transitioning to the specific gaming state,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Display control means for controlling at least the display state of the variable display device among the electrical components used for game effects;
Among electrical components used for game effects, comprising electrical component control means for controlling predetermined electrical components other than the variable display device,
The game control means includes
It is determined whether or not the display result of variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result, whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and whether or not the post-transition notification effect is executed. A pre-determination means;
Variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time from the start of variable display of the identification information in the variable display device until the display result is derived and displayed based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
Variable display command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display command capable of specifying the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means;
Display result command transmission means for transmitting a display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the prior determination means ;
An end notification command transmitting means for transmitting an end notification command for executing an end notification effect for notifying the end of the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state ends ;
The electrical component control means includes
Based on the reception of the variable display command, an electric component variable display command transmitting means for transmitting an electric component variable display command capable of specifying the contents of the variable display command to the display control means;
Based on the reception of the display result command, an electrical component display result command transmission means for transmitting an electrical component display result command capable of specifying the content of the display result command to the display control means ;
An electrical component end notification command transmitting means for transmitting to the display control means an electrical component end notification command capable of specifying the content of the end notification command based on the reception of the end notification command ;
The display control means includes
Based on the electrical component variable display command and the electrical component display result command, variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is executed, and the variable display time specified by the electrical component variable display command has elapsed. Variable display executing means for deriving and displaying a display result on the variable display device;
A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the post-transition notification effect after transitioning to the specific gaming state ;
End notification executing means for executing the end notification effect based on the transmission of the electrical component end notification command ;
The variable display command transmission means is a specific display that can specify that the variable display command is determined by the prior determination means to use the variable display display result of the variable display device as the specific display result. Variable display command, or a variable display command for non-specific display that can specify that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is determined not to be the specific display result by the predetermining means And
The variable display execution means includes
The electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command and the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device by the predetermining means are used as the specific display result. Then, when the electrical component display result command transmitted based on the reception of the display result command that can be determined that the predetermined transition condition has been determined and received is received, Based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the electrical component variable display command, the special display result indicating the transition to the special game state after the specific game state is ended as the specific display result. Special display result derivation display means for derivation display on the variable display device;
The electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command and the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device by the predetermining means are used as the specific display result. Then, when receiving the electrical component display result command transmitted based on receiving the display result command that can be determined that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied, Based on the elapse of the variable display time specified by the electrical component variable display command, the specific display result is a non-special display result indicating that the special game state is not shifted to after the specific game state is ended. Non-special display result derivation display means for derivation display on the variable display device;
The electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command, and the display result command capable of specifying that the pre-determining means has decided to execute the post-transition notification effect. When the electric component display result command transmitted based on the reception of the electric component display result command is received, the variable display device has the variable display time specified by the electric component variable display command. Non-special display result derivation display means for performing post-transition notification production for deriving and displaying non-special display results;
When the electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the specific display variable display command is received, but the electrical component display result command is not received, the electrical component variable display command is specified. Non-reception non-special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying the non-special display result on the variable display device based on the fact that the variable display time has elapsed,
The post-transition notification effect executing means is the post-transition notification effect execution in the specific gaming state that is transferred when the non-special display result is derived and displayed by the post-transition notification effect execution non-special display result derivation display means. the execution,
The end notification command transmission means is determined as the end notification command by the prior determination means to change the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device to the specific display result and the predetermined transition condition. It is determined that it is satisfied, or it is determined that the display result of variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is the specific display result by the pre-determining means and that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied. Send a command that can identify
When the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device by the non-reception non-special display result derivation display unit, the display control unit is configured to display the variable display by the prior determination unit as the end notification command. It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the device is the specific display result, and the electrical component end notification is received based on the reception of a command that can be specified to satisfy the predetermined transition condition An end notification effect executing means for executing an end notification effect for notifying that the predetermined transition condition is established as the end notification effect by the end notification execution means based on the command being transmitted. A gaming machine characterized by that. The display control means includes identification information determination means for determining identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result on the variable display device based on the variable display command or the display result command.
The identification information determining means receives identification information based on the received non-specific display variable display command regardless of whether or not the display result command is received when the non-specific display variable display command is received. decide
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The display control means includes identification information determination means for determining identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result on the variable display device based on the electric component variable display command or the electric component display result command,
The identification information determining means, whether or not the electrical component display result command is received when the electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the non-specific display variable display command is received. First, identification information is determined on the basis of the electric component variable display command transmitted based on the received non-specific display variable display command.
The gaming machine according to claim 2. The pre-determining means determines whether to execute the post-transition notification effect when ending the specific gaming state,
Game control means includes a presentation period selection means for selecting an effect period that runs the exit notification effect,
Exit notification command transmitting means, as the end notification command, and sends the whether the possible specific command is determined to perform the migration after notification effect when terminating the specific game state by the predetermination means,
The post-transition notification effect executing means has transmitted a command capable of specifying that the post-transition notification effect is determined to be executed when the specific gaming state is ended by the prior determination means as the end notification command. Based on the above, as the end notification effect , a post-transition notification effect is executed,
When the predetermining unit ends the specific gaming state when the predetermining unit determines to execute the post-transition notification effect when the predetermining unit ends the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 , wherein a longer period is selected as an effect period of the end notification effect than when it is determined not to execute the notification effect after the transition. The game control means includes a specific game state start command transmission means for transmitting a specific game state start command indicating that the specific game state is started,
The specific gaming state start command transmission means is determined as the specific gaming state start command by the prior determination means to change the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device to the specific display result. The transition condition is determined to be satisfied, or the predetermined determination condition is satisfied and the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is determined to be the specific display result by the predetermining means. Send a command that can be identified as
When the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device by the non-special display result derivation display unit at the time of non-reception, the display control unit performs the variable display device as the specific gaming state start command by the prior determination unit. I based the identification variable display of the display result of the information that the specific possible commands that are determined to be satisfied the predetermined shift condition while being determined to be in a specific display result is sent, the specific game when you are migrating to a state, any of the claims 1 to 5 comprising a transition after notification effect execution unit said predetermined shift condition is to perform the post-migration notification effect for notifying whether or not satisfied The gaming machine described in 1. The game control means includes a specific game state start command transmission means for transmitting a specific game state start command indicating that the specific game state is started,
The specific gaming state start command transmission means is determined as the specific gaming state start command by the prior determination means to change the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device to the specific display result. The transition condition is determined to be satisfied, or the predetermined determination condition is satisfied and the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the variable display device is determined to be the specific display result by the predetermining means. Send a command that can be identified as
The display control means
When a non-special display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device by the non-special display result derivation display means at the time of non-reception, the identification information of the variable display device can be changed by the prior determination means as the specific gaming state start command. It is determined that the display result of display is the specific display result, and based on the transmission of a command that can specify that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the specific gaming state is made. A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing a post-transition notification effect for notifying whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
An end-time notification effect prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of the end-time notification effect by the end-time notification effect execution means when informing that the predetermined transition condition is established in the post-transition notification effect execution means by the post-transition notification effect execution means; including
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5 .

Images